MAX24288ETK2 [MICROSEMI]

ATM/SONET/SDH IC,;
MAX24288ETK2
型号: MAX24288ETK2
厂家: Microsemi    Microsemi
描述:

ATM/SONET/SDH IC,

ATM 异步传输模式 电信 电信集成电路
文件: 总122页 (文件大小:1865K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
Data Sheet  
April 2018  
MAX24288  
IEEE 1588 Packet Timestamper and Clock  
and 1Gbps Parallel-to-Serial MII Converter  
General Description  
Highlighted Features  
Complete Hardware Support for IEEE 1588  
Ordinary, Boundary, and Transparent Clocks  
Flexible Block for Any 1588 Architecture  
1588 Clock Hardware  
The MAX24288 is a flexible, low-cost IEEE 1588  
clock and timestamper with an SGMII or 1000BASE-X  
serial interface and a parallel MII interface that can  
be configured for GMII, RGMII, or 10/100 MII. The  
device provides all required hardware support for  
high-accuracy time and frequency synchronization  
using the IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol. In both  
the transmit and receive directions 1588 packets are  
identified and timestamped with high precision.  
System software makes use of these timestamps to  
determine the time offset between the system and its  
timing master. Software can then correct any time  
error by steering the device’s 1588 clock subsystem  
appropriately. The device provides the necessary I/O  
to time-synchronize with a 1588 master elsewhere in  
the same system or to be the master to which slave  
components can synchronize.  
Steerable by Software with 2-8ns Time  
Resolution and 2-32ns Period Resolution  
1ns Input Timestamp Accuracy and Output  
Edge Placement Accuracy  
Three Time/Frequency Controls: Direct Time  
Write, Time Adjustment, and High-Resolution  
Frequency Adjustment  
Programmable Clock and Time-Alignment I/O  
Input Event Timestamper Detects Incoming  
Time Alignment (e.g., 1 PPS) or Clock Edges  
Output Event Generator Provides Output Clock  
Signal or Time Alignment Signal  
Built-In Support for Telecom Equipment Timing  
Architecture with Dual Redundant Timing Cards  
In addition, the MAX24288 is a full-featured, gigabit  
parallel-to-serial MII converter. It provides full SGMII  
revision 1.8 compliance and also interfaces directly to  
1Gbps 1000BASE-X SFP optical modules.  
1588 Timestamping Hardware  
1588 v1 and v2 Packets, Transmit and Receive  
Packet Classifier Supports 1588 Over Ethernet,  
IPv4/UDP, IPv6/UDP ,or MPLS, and Is  
Programmable for More Complex Stacks  
Applications  
1588-Enabled Equipment with 1G Ethernet Ports  
Wireless Base Stations and Controllers  
Switches, Routers, DSLAMs, PON Equipment  
Pseudowire Circuit Emulation Equipment  
Test and Measurement Systems  
Supports 802.1Q VLAN Tags and MAC-in-MAC  
One-Step Operation: On-the-Fly Timestamp  
Insertion or Transparent Clock Corrections; No  
Need for Follow-Up Packets  
Industrial and Factory Automation Equipment  
Medical Equipment  
Can Insert All Timestamps, Receive and  
Transmit, Into Packets for Easy Software Access  
Optional Two-Step Operation  
Ordering Information  
Parallel-to-Serial MII Conversion  
PART  
TEMP RANGE  
PIN-PACKAGE  
Bidirectional Wire-Speed Interface Conversion  
Serial: 1000BASE-X or SGMII v1.8 (4, 6, or 8 Pin)  
Parallel: GMII, RGMII, or 10/100 MII  
Translates Link Speed and Duplex Mode  
Negotiation Between MDIO and SGMII PCS  
68 TQFN-EP*  
trays  
MAX24288ETK2  
-40C to +85C  
68 TQFN-EP*  
tape & reel  
MAX24288ETK2T  
-40C to +85C  
Suffix 2 denotes a lead(Pb)-free/RoHS-compliant package.  
*EP = Exposed pad.  
Full Support for 1588 + Synchronous Ethernet  
MDIO and SPIInterfaces  
Block Diagram appears on page 8.  
Register Map appears on page 64.  
1.2V Operation with 3.3V I/O  
1
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
1.  
APPLICATION EXAMPLES.......................................................................................................... 7  
BLOCK DIAGRAM........................................................................................................................ 8  
DETAILED FEATURES................................................................................................................. 8  
ACRONYMS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND GLOSSARY .................................................................. 10  
PIN DESCRIPTIONS................................................................................................................... 10  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................... 16  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
6.1 PIN CONFIGURATION DURING RESET........................................................................................... 16  
6.2 GENERAL-PURPOSE I/O.............................................................................................................. 17  
6.2.1  
Receive Recovered Clock Squelch Criteria......................................................................................... 18  
6.3 RESET, POWER DOWN AND PROCESSOR INTERRUPT ................................................................... 18  
6.3.1  
6.3.2  
6.3.3  
Reset.................................................................................................................................................... 18  
Power Down......................................................................................................................................... 19  
Processor Interrupts............................................................................................................................. 19  
6.4 SPI - SERIAL PROCESSOR INTERFACE......................................................................................... 19  
6.5 MDIO INTERFACE....................................................................................................................... 23  
6.5.1  
6.5.2  
MDIO Overview.................................................................................................................................... 23  
Examples of MAX24288 and PHY Management Using MDIO ............................................................ 25  
6.6 SERIAL INTERFACE 1000BASE-X OR SGMII............................................................................. 27  
6.7 PARALLEL INTERFACE GMII, RGMII, MII................................................................................... 28  
6.7.1  
6.7.2  
6.7.3  
GMII Mode ........................................................................................................................................... 28  
RGMII Mode......................................................................................................................................... 29  
MII Mode .............................................................................................................................................. 30  
6.8 AUTO-NEGOTIATION (AN) ........................................................................................................... 31  
6.8.1  
6.8.2  
1000BASE-X Auto-Negotiation............................................................................................................ 31  
SGMII Control Information Transfer..................................................................................................... 33  
6.9 DATA PATHS .............................................................................................................................. 36  
6.9.1  
6.9.2  
6.9.3  
Serial to Parallel Conversion and Decoding ........................................................................................ 36  
Parallel to Serial Conversion and Encoding......................................................................................... 36  
Rate Adaption Buffers, Jumbo Packets and Clock Frequency Differences......................................... 36  
TIMING PATHS......................................................................................................................... 37  
6.10  
6.10.1 RX PLL................................................................................................................................................. 38  
6.10.2 TX PLL ................................................................................................................................................. 38  
6.10.3 Input Jitter Tolerance ........................................................................................................................... 38  
6.10.4 Output Jitter Generation....................................................................................................................... 38  
6.10.5 TX PLL Jitter Transfer.......................................................................................................................... 38  
6.10.6 GPIO Pins as Clock Outputs................................................................................................................ 38  
6.11  
LOOPBACKS............................................................................................................................ 39  
6.11.1 Diagnostic Loopback............................................................................................................................ 39  
6.11.2 Terminal Loopback............................................................................................................................... 39  
6.11.3 Remote Loopback................................................................................................................................ 39  
6.12  
6.13  
DIAGNOSTIC AND TEST FUNCTIONS.......................................................................................... 40  
1588 HARDWARE.................................................................................................................... 41  
6.13.1 1588 Time Engine................................................................................................................................ 41  
6.13.2 Output Clock Generator ....................................................................................................................... 44  
6.13.3 Programmable Event Generators ........................................................................................................ 44  
6.13.4 Input Signal Timestamping .................................................................................................................. 47  
6.13.5 Packet Timestamping........................................................................................................................... 48  
6.13.6 Packet Classification............................................................................................................................ 48  
6.13.7 On-the-Fly Packet Modification............................................................................................................ 54  
2
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
6.13.8 Circuit Emulation Timestamping for Adaptive Clock Recovery............................................................ 61  
6.14  
6.15  
6.16  
DATA PATH LATENCIES............................................................................................................ 62  
POWER SUPPLY CONSIDERATIONS........................................................................................... 62  
STARTUP PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................ 63  
7.  
REGISTER DESCRIPTIONS....................................................................................................... 64  
7.1 REGISTER MAP .......................................................................................................................... 64  
7.2 DIRECT ACCESS REGISTERS....................................................................................................... 66  
7.2.1  
7.2.2  
7.2.3  
7.2.4  
7.2.5  
7.2.6  
7.2.7  
7.2.8  
7.2.9  
BMCR................................................................................................................................................... 66  
BMSR................................................................................................................................................... 67  
ID1 and ID2.......................................................................................................................................... 68  
AN_ADV............................................................................................................................................... 69  
AN_RX ................................................................................................................................................. 69  
AN_EXP............................................................................................................................................... 69  
EXT_STAT........................................................................................................................................... 70  
JIT_DIAG ............................................................................................................................................. 70  
PCSCR................................................................................................................................................. 71  
7.2.10 GMIICR ................................................................................................................................................ 72  
7.2.11 CR ........................................................................................................................................................ 73  
7.2.12 IR.......................................................................................................................................................... 74  
7.2.13 PAGESEL ............................................................................................................................................ 75  
7.2.14 ID.......................................................................................................................................................... 76  
7.2.15 GPIOCR1 ............................................................................................................................................. 76  
7.2.16 GPIOCR2 ............................................................................................................................................. 76  
7.2.17 GPIOSR ............................................................................................................................................... 77  
7.2.18 PTP_IR................................................................................................................................................. 78  
7.2.19 PTP_IE................................................................................................................................................. 79  
7.2.20 PTP_SR ............................................................................................................................................... 80  
7.2.21 HDR_DAT1 .......................................................................................................................................... 81  
7.2.22 HDR_DAT2 .......................................................................................................................................... 81  
7.2.23 TEIO1 TEIO5 .................................................................................................................................... 82  
7.2.24 TERW................................................................................................................................................... 83  
7.2.25 PTPCR1 ............................................................................................................................................... 84  
7.2.26 PTPCR2 ............................................................................................................................................... 85  
7.2.27 TSCR.................................................................................................................................................... 86  
7.2.28 PEGCR................................................................................................................................................. 87  
7.2.29 TS1_DIV1............................................................................................................................................. 87  
7.2.30 TS_FIFO_EN ....................................................................................................................................... 88  
7.2.31 TS_INSERT_EN .................................................................................................................................. 89  
7.2.32 TS_INSERT ......................................................................................................................................... 90  
7.2.33 CF_INGRESS ...................................................................................................................................... 91  
7.2.34 CF_EGRESS ....................................................................................................................................... 92  
7.2.35 PTPCR3 ............................................................................................................................................... 93  
7.2.36 UID_CHK ............................................................................................................................................. 94  
7.2.37 PKT_CLASS ........................................................................................................................................ 95  
7.2.38 VLAN2_ID ............................................................................................................................................ 96  
7.2.39 MEF_ECID_HI ..................................................................................................................................... 96  
7.2.40 MEF_ECID_LO .................................................................................................................................... 96  
7.2.41 MPLS_LABEL_HI................................................................................................................................. 96  
7.2.42 MPLS_LABEL_LO ............................................................................................................................... 96  
7.2.43 ETYPE_ALT......................................................................................................................................... 97  
7.2.44 UDP_SRC ............................................................................................................................................ 97  
7.2.45 UDP_DST ............................................................................................................................................ 97  
7.2.46 CFG_MASK ......................................................................................................................................... 98  
7.2.47 CFG_MATCH....................................................................................................................................... 98  
7.2.48 CFG_OFFSET ..................................................................................................................................... 98  
7.2.49 CFG_WR.............................................................................................................................................. 99  
7.2.50 PHY_MATCH....................................................................................................................................... 99  
3
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.3 IEEE1588 INDIRECT REGISTERS............................................................................................... 100  
7.3.1  
7.3.2  
7.3.3  
7.3.4  
7.3.5  
7.3.6  
7.3.7  
7.3.8  
7.3.9  
TIME................................................................................................................................................... 100  
PERIOD ............................................................................................................................................. 100  
PER_ADJ ........................................................................................................................................... 100  
ADJ_CNT ........................................................................................................................................... 100  
PEG1_FIFO, PEG2_FIFO.................................................................................................................. 100  
TS1_FIFO, TS2_FIFO, TS3_FIFO..................................................................................................... 101  
MEAN_PATH_DELAY ....................................................................................................................... 101  
CF_COR1, CF_COR2, CF_COR3..................................................................................................... 101  
Configurable Packet Classifier Criteria .............................................................................................. 101  
7.3.10 PTP_OFFSET.................................................................................................................................... 101  
8.  
9.  
JTAG TEST ACCESS PORT AND BOUNDARY SCAN............................................................ 102  
8.1 JTAG DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................. 102  
8.2 JTAG TAP CONTROLLER STATE MACHINE DESCRIPTION ........................................................... 102  
8.3 JTAG INSTRUCTION REGISTER AND INSTRUCTIONS.................................................................... 104  
8.4 JTAG TEST REGISTERS............................................................................................................ 105  
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................................................... 106  
9.1 RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS.................................................................................. 106  
9.2 DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS .......................................................................................... 106  
9.2.1  
9.2.2  
CMOS/TTL DC Characteristics.......................................................................................................... 107  
SGMII/1000BASE-X DC Characteristics............................................................................................ 107  
9.3 AC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS........................................................................................... 108  
9.3.1  
9.3.2  
9.3.3  
9.3.4  
9.3.5  
9.3.6  
9.3.7  
9.3.8  
9.3.9  
REFCLK AC Characteristics .............................................................................................................. 108  
SGMII/1000BASE-X Interface Receive AC Characteristics............................................................... 108  
SGMII/1000BASE-X Interface Transmit AC Characteristics.............................................................. 108  
Parallel Interface Receive AC Characteristics ................................................................................... 110  
Parallel Interface Transmit AC Characteristics .................................................................................. 112  
MDIO Interface AC Characteristics.................................................................................................... 114  
SPI Interface AC Characteristics ....................................................................................................... 115  
JTAG Interface AC Characteristics.................................................................................................... 117  
1588 GPIO Propagation Delays......................................................................................................... 118  
9.3.10 Packet Timestamp Latencies............................................................................................................. 118  
10. PIN ASSIGNMENTS.................................................................................................................. 119  
11. PACKAGE AND THERMAL INFORMATION............................................................................ 120  
12. DATA SHEET REVISION HISTORY ......................................................................................... 121  
4
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
TABLE OF FIGURES  
Figure 2-1. Block Diagram........................................................................................................................................... 8  
Figure 6-1. SPI Clock Polarity and Phase Options................................................................................................... 21  
Figure 6-2. SPI Bus Transactions.............................................................................................................................. 22  
Figure 6-3. MDIO Slave State Machine..................................................................................................................... 24  
Figure 6-4. Management Information Flow Options, Case 1,Tri-Mode PHY............................................................. 25  
Figure 6-5. Management Information Flow Options, Case 2, SGMII Switch Chip .................................................... 25  
Figure 6-6. Management Information Flow Options, Case 3, 1000BASE-X Interface .............................................. 26  
Figure 6-7. Recommended External Components for High-Speed Serial Interface ................................................. 27  
Figure 6-8. Auto-Negotiation with a Link Partner over 1000BASE-X ........................................................................ 32  
Figure 6-9. 1000BASE-X Auto-Negotiation tx_Config_Reg and rx_Config_Reg Fields ........................................... 32  
Figure 6-10. SGMII Control Information Generation, Reception and Acknowledgement.......................................... 34  
Figure 6-11. SGMII tx_Config_Reg and rx_Config_Reg Fields ................................................................................ 34  
Figure 6-12. Timing Path Diagram............................................................................................................................. 37  
Figure 6-13. 1588 Time Engine ................................................................................................................................. 42  
Figure 6-14. Time Engine Period Generator ............................................................................................................. 42  
Figure 6-15. Sync and Delay_Req Tmestamp Points ............................................................................................... 56  
Figure 6-16. Pdelay Timestamp Points...................................................................................................................... 57  
Figure 8-1. JTAG Block Diagram............................................................................................................................. 102  
Figure 8-2. JTAG TAP Controller State Machine .................................................................................................... 104  
Figure 9-1. MII/GMII/RGMII Receive Timing Waveforms........................................................................................ 110  
Figure 9-2. MII/GMII/RGMII Transmit Timing Waveforms....................................................................................... 112  
Figure 9-3. MDIO Interface Timing .......................................................................................................................... 114  
Figure 9-4. SPI Interface Timing Diagram ............................................................................................................... 116  
Figure 9-5. JTAG Timing Diagram........................................................................................................................... 117  
TABLE OF TABLES  
Table 5-1. Pin Type Descriptions............................................................................................................................... 10  
Table 5-2. Detailed Pin Descriptions Global Pins (2 Pins) ..................................................................................... 10  
Table 5-3. Detailed Pin Descriptions MDIO Interface (2 Pins) ............................................................................... 11  
Table 5-4. Detailed Pin Descriptions SPI Interface (4 pins) ................................................................................... 11  
Table 5-5. Detailed Pin Descriptions JTAG Interface (5 pins)................................................................................ 11  
Table 5-6. Detailed Pin Descriptions GPIO signals (5 dedicated pins, 4 shared pins) .......................................... 12  
Table 5-7. Detailed Pin Descriptions SGMII/1000BASE-X Serial Interface (7 pins) .............................................. 13  
Table 5-8. Detailed Pin Descriptions Parallel Interface (25 pins)........................................................................... 13  
Table 5-9. Detailed Pin Descriptions Power and Ground Pins (15 pins)................................................................ 15  
Table 6-1. Reset Configuration Pins, 15-Pin Mode (COL=0) .................................................................................... 16  
Table 6-2. Parallel Interface Configuration ................................................................................................................ 16  
Table 6-3. Reset Configuration Pins, 3-Pin Mode (COL=1) ...................................................................................... 17  
Table 6-4. GPO1, GPIO1 and GPIO3 Configuration Options ................................................................................... 17  
Table 6-5. GPO2 and GPIO2 Configuration Options................................................................................................. 17  
Table 6-6. GPIO4, GPIO5, GPIO6 and GPIO7 Configuration Options ..................................................................... 18  
Table 6-7. Parallel Interface Modes........................................................................................................................... 28  
Table 6-8. GMII Parallel Bus Pin Naming.................................................................................................................. 28  
Table 6-9. RGMII Parallel Bus Pin Naming ............................................................................................................... 29  
Table 6-10. MII Parallel Bus Pin Naming................................................................................................................... 31  
Table 6-11. AN_ADV 1000BASE-X Auto-Negotiation Ability Advertisement Register (MDIO 4).............................. 32  
Table 6-12. AN_RX 1000BASE-X Auto-negotiation Ability Receive Register (MDIO 5)........................................... 33  
Table 6-13. AN_ADV SGMII Configuration Information Register (MDIO 4).............................................................. 35  
Table 6-14. AN_RX SGMII Configuration Information Receive Register (MDIO 5) .................................................. 35  
Table 6-15. Timing Path Muxes No Loopback ....................................................................................................... 37  
5
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Table 6-16. Timing Path Muxes DLB Loopback..................................................................................................... 37  
Table 6-17. Timing Path Muxes RLB Loopback..................................................................................................... 38  
Table 6-18. PEG Command FIFO Fields .................................................................................................................. 44  
Table 6-19. PEG Commands..................................................................................................................................... 45  
Table 6-20. Common Frequencies Using Repeat Command.................................................................................... 46  
Table 6-21. Common Frequencies Using Fractional Clock Synthesis Repeat Command........................................ 46  
Table 6-22. Configurable Packet Classifier Start Positions....................................................................................... 51  
Table 6-23. One-Step/On-the-Fly Selection Matrix ................................................................................................... 54  
Table 6-24. Ethernet and IP Multicast Addresses to Check...................................................................................... 61  
Table 6-25. Source of Unicast Addresses to Overwrite Multicast ............................................................................. 61  
Table 6-26. GMII Data Path Latencies ...................................................................................................................... 62  
Table 7-1. PHY Register Map (MDIO Only) .............................................................................................................. 64  
Table 7-2. 1588 Register Map (MDIO or SPI) ........................................................................................................... 65  
Table 7-3. TEIO Register Mapping to RDSEL Sources............................................................................................. 82  
Table 7-4. TEIO Register Mapping to WRSEL Destinations ..................................................................................... 82  
Table 8-1. JTAG Instruction Codes ......................................................................................................................... 104  
Table 8-2. JTAG ID Code ........................................................................................................................................ 105  
Table 9-1. Recommended DC Operating Conditions.............................................................................................. 106  
Table 9-2. DC Characteristics.................................................................................................................................. 106  
Table 9-3. DC Characteristics for Parallel, MDIO and SPI Interfaces..................................................................... 107  
Table 9-4. SGMII/1000BASE-X Transmit DC Characteristics................................................................................. 107  
Table 9-5. SGMII/1000BASE-X Receive DC Characteristics.................................................................................. 107  
Table 9-6. REFCLK AC Characteristics .................................................................................................................. 108  
Table 9-7. 1000BASE-X and SGMII Receive AC Characteristics ........................................................................... 108  
Table 9-8. 1000BASE-X and SGMII Receive Jitter Tolerance ................................................................................ 108  
Table 9-9. SGMII and 1000BASE-X Transmit AC Characteristics.......................................................................... 108  
Table 9-10. 1000BASE-X Transmit Jitter Characteristics ....................................................................................... 108  
Table 9-11. GMII Receive AC Characteristics......................................................................................................... 110  
Table 9-12. RGMII-1000 Receive AC Characteristics............................................................................................. 110  
Table 9-13. RGMII-10/100 Receive AC Characteristics.......................................................................................... 111  
Table 9-14. MIIDCE Receive AC Characteristics.................................................................................................. 111  
Table 9-15. MIIDTE Receive AC Characteristics .................................................................................................. 111  
Table 9-16. GMII and RGMII-1000 Transmit AC Characteristics............................................................................ 112  
Table 9-17. RGMII-10/100 Transmit AC Characteristics......................................................................................... 113  
Table 9-18. MIIDCE Transmit AC Characteristics................................................................................................. 113  
Table 9-19. MIIDTE Transmit AC Characteristics ................................................................................................. 113  
Table 9-20. MDIO Interface AC Characteristics ...................................................................................................... 114  
Table 9-21. SPI Interface Timing............................................................................................................................. 115  
Table 9-22. JTAG Interface Timing.......................................................................................................................... 117  
Table 9-23. 1588 GPIO Propagation Delays ........................................................................................................... 118  
Table 9-24. Transmit/Egress Packet Timestamp to First Bit After SFD on TDP/TDN ............................................ 118  
Table 9-25. Receive/Ingress First Bit After SFD on RDP/RDN to Packet Timestamp............................................ 118  
Table 11-1. Package Thermal Properties, Natural Convection ............................................................................... 121  
6
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
1. Application Examples  
Example 1: Single-Port 1588 Slave Node  
Local  
OSC  
1.25G  
Serial  
Ethernet  
over fiber  
Processor  
SFP Module  
GMII  
1588  
Software  
-OR-  
-OR-  
MAX24288  
MDIO  
Ethernet  
over copper  
1000BASE-T  
PHY  
SGMII  
to frequency-syntonized  
or time-synchronized  
system components  
1588 recovered clock, e.g. 25MHz  
1588 recovered time, e.g. 1 PPS  
Example 2: Multiport System with Switch-Connected 1588 Slave Node  
1.25G  
Serial  
SFP Modules  
SGMII  
Local  
OSC  
or  
GbE Switch  
IC  
Ethernet  
1000BASE-T  
PHYs  
over fiber  
Processor  
GMII  
1588  
Software  
MAX24288  
MDIO  
to other PHYs  
to frequency-syntonized  
or time-synchronized  
system components  
1588 recovered clock, e.g. 25MHz  
1588 recovered time, e.g. 1 PPS  
Example 3: Multiport System, Boundary or Transparent Clock, Port Card Logic  
1.25G  
Serial  
Ethernet  
over fiber  
Processor  
SFP Module  
GMII  
1588  
Software  
-OR-  
-OR-  
MAX24288  
MDIO  
Ethernet  
over copper  
1000BASE-T  
PHY  
packet data to/from central switch function  
SGMII  
system clock, e.g. 25MHz  
system time, e.g. 1 PPS  
line clock, e.g. 25MHz  
from central  
timing function  
to central timing function  
for SyncE or  
1588 + SyncE operation  
line clocks from other ports  
Example 4: Multiport System, Boundary or Transparent Clock, Central Timing Function  
Processor  
1.25G  
GMII  
1588  
Software  
Serial  
MAX24288  
1588 Clock  
packet data to/from central switch function  
MDIO  
system time, e.g. 1 PPS  
system clock, e.g. 25MHz  
Local OSC  
Stratum 3+  
clk  
to all port cards  
from port cards,  
for SyncE or  
1588+SyncE operation  
line clocks, e.g. 25MHz  
DS31400  
Clock Sync IC  
other clocks,  
various frequencies  
7
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
2. Block Diagram  
Figure 2-1. Block Diagram  
MAX24288  
Rx SOP  
Detect  
Rx SOP  
D
D
C
D
C
RD[9:0]  
RD  
RXD[7:0]  
RXCLK  
RX_DV  
RX_ER  
COL  
RDP  
RDN  
Receive  
CDR  
PCS  
Decoder  
(10b/8b)  
C
125MHz  
RCLK  
1.25GHz  
1588  
Packet  
Classifier  
and  
Receive  
Rate  
Adaption  
Buffer  
GMII  
RGMII  
MII  
De-  
Serializer  
CRS  
Modifier  
Auto-  
Negotiate  
TDP  
1588  
Packet  
Classifier  
and  
TDN  
Transmit  
Driver  
Transmit  
GMII  
RGMII  
MII  
D
D
C
D
C
TD[9:0]  
TD  
TXD[7:0]  
GTXCLK  
TXCLK  
TX_EN  
TX_ER  
Rate  
Adaption  
Buffer  
PCS  
Encoder  
(8b/10b)  
TCLKP  
TCLKN  
C
125MHz  
625MHz  
Serializer  
Tx SOP  
Detect  
Modifier  
Tx SOP  
625MHz  
125MHz, 62.5MHz, 25MHz, 2.5MHz  
REFCLK  
TX PLL  
MDIO  
MDC  
Tx SOP  
Rx SOP  
125MHz, 8 phases  
RST_N  
time  
125MHz  
Control  
and  
Status  
CS_N  
SCLK  
SDI  
SDO  
ALOS  
1588  
Time  
Engine  
Output  
Clock  
TS1  
Time  
Stamper  
TS2  
Time  
Stamper  
TS3  
Time  
Stamper  
PEG1  
Prog. Event  
Generator  
PEG2  
Prog. Event  
Generator  
Generator  
JTRST_N  
JTAG  
GPIO Control  
RCLK  
3. Detailed Features  
General Features  
Control and status through MDIO interface or SPI interface  
High-speed MDIO interface (12.5MHz slave only) with optional preamble suppression  
Optional SPI 4-wire serial microprocessor interface (25MHz, slave only)  
Operates from a 10, 12.8, 25 or 125MHz reference clock  
Optional 125MHz output clock for MAC to use as GTXCLK  
Parallel-Serial MII Conversion Features  
Bidirectional wire-speed interface conversion  
Serial Interface: 1000BASE-X or SGMII revision 1.8 (4-, 6- or 8-Pin)  
Parallel Interface: GMII, RGMII (10, 100 and 1000Mbps) or 10/100 MII (DTE or DCE)  
8-pin source-clocked SGMII mode  
4-pin 1000BASE-X SERDES mode to interface with optical modules  
Connects processors with parallel MII interfaces to 1000BASE-X SFP optical modules  
Connects processors with parallel MII interfaces to PHY or switch ICs with SGMII interfaces  
Interface conversion is transparent to MAC layer and higher layers  
8
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Translates link speed and duplex mode between GMII/MII MDIO and SGMII PCS  
1588 Clock Features  
Steerable by software with 2-8ns time resolution and 2-32ns period resolution  
1ns input timestamp accuracy and output edge placement accuracy  
Initialized and steered by software on an external processor to follow an external 1588 master  
Three time/frequency controls: direct time write, time adjustment, and high-resolution frequency adjustment  
Programmable clock and time-alignment I/O to synchronize all boards in large systems  
o
o
o
o
Can frequency-lock to an input clock signal from elsewhere in the system  
Can timestamp an input time alignment signal to time-lock to a master elsewhere in the system (e.g. 1 PPS)  
Can provide an output clock signal to slave components elsewhere in the system (125MHz / N , 1≤N≤255)  
Can provide an output time alignment signal to slave components elsewhere in the system (e.g. 1 PPS)  
Input signal timestamper can stamp rising edges, falling edges or both  
Flexible programmable event generator (PEG) can output 1 PPS, one pulse per period, and a wide variety of  
clock signals  
Full support for dual redundant timing cards to match architecture used in SONET/SDH  
Full support for switches and routers as transparent clocks or boundary clocks  
Compatible with a wide variety of 1588 system architectures  
1588 Timestamper Features  
Identifies and timestamps 1588 v1 and v2 packets in both transmit and receive directions  
Programmable packet classifier can identify packets transported by a variety of protocol stacks  
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
1588 over Ethernet  
1588 over IPv4/UDP  
1588 over IPv6/UDP  
1588 over MPLS  
Configurable for more complex stacks as well  
Recognizes 802.1Q VLAN tags and 802.1ah MAC-in-MAC  
Can be configured to identify CESoP or SAToP for timing over adaptive-mode circuit emulation  
Transmit and receive timestamping with 1ns resolution  
One-step operation minimizes network bandwidth consumption  
o
o
o
On-the-fly timestamp insertion  
On-the-fly corrections in transparent clocks  
No need for follow-up packets  
Can insert ALL timestamps (receive and transmit) into packets for easy software access  
o
o
o
Three insert methods: direct overwrite, read-add-write, and read-subtract-write  
Eliminates reads from timestamp FIFOs  
Minimizes processor bus traffic  
Optional two-step operation  
Optional 8-entry timestamp FIFOs  
Synchronous Ethernet Features  
Full support for 1588 over Synchronous Ethernet  
Receive path bit clock can be output on a GPIO pin to line-time the system from the Ethernet port  
Transmit path can be frequency-locked to a system clock signal connected to the REFCLK pin  
9
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
4. Acronyms, Abbreviations, and Glossary  
BC  
Boundary Clock  
DCE  
DDR  
DTE  
E2E  
OC  
P2P  
PCB  
PHY  
PTP  
TC  
Data Communication Equipment  
Dual Data Rate (data driven and latched on both clock edges)  
Data Terminating Equipment  
End to End  
Ordinary Clock  
Peer to Peer  
Printed Circuit Board  
Physical. Refers to either a transceiver device or a protocol layer  
Precision Time Protocol IEEE1588  
Transparent Clock  
Ingress  
Egress  
Receive  
Transmit  
The serial (SGMII) to parallel (GMII) direction  
The parallel (GMII) to serial (SGMII) direction  
The serial (SGMII) to parallel (GMII) direction  
The parallel (GMII) to serial (SGMII) direction  
5. Pin Descriptions  
Note that some pins have different pin names and functions under different configurations.  
Table 5-1. Pin Type Descriptions  
Type  
Definition  
I
Input  
Idiff  
IO  
Input differential  
Bi-directional  
IOr  
IOz  
O
Bi-directional, sampled at reset  
Bi-directional, can go high impedance  
Output  
Odiff  
Oz  
Output, differential (CML)  
Output, can go hi impedance  
Table 5-2. Detailed Pin Descriptions Global Pins (2 Pins)  
Pin Name  
RST_N  
PIN # Type  
67  
Pin Description  
Reset (active low, asynchronous)  
I
This signal resets all logic, state machines and registers in the device. Pin states  
are sampled and used to set the default values of several register fields as  
described in 6.1. RST_N should be held low for at least 100s. See section  
6.3.1.  
10  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Pin Name  
REFCLK  
PIN # Type  
68  
Pin Description  
I
Reference Clock  
This signal is the reference clock for the device. The frequency can be 10MHz,  
12.8MHz, 25MHz or 125MHz ± 100 ppm. At reset the frequency is specified  
using the RXD[3:2] pins (see section 6.1). The REFCLK signal is the input clock  
to the TX PLL. See section 6.10.  
Note: REFCLK frequency cannot be changed dynamically among the  
frequencies listed above. To change REFCLK frequency, (1) power down  
MAX24288, (2) change REFCLK frequency, then (3) power up MAX24288.  
REFCLK is an analog input that is internally biased with a 10kresistor to 1.2V.  
This support AC-coupling if desired.  
Table 5-3. Detailed Pin Descriptions MDIO Interface (2 Pins)  
Pin Name  
PIN # Type  
Pin Description  
MDC  
41  
I
MDIO Clock.  
MDC is the clock signal of the 2-wire MDIO interface. It can be any frequency up  
to 12.5MHz. See section 6.5.  
MDIO  
42  
IOz  
MDIO Data.  
This is the bidirectional, half-duplex data signal of the MDIO interface. It is  
sampled and updated on positive edges of MDC. IEEE 802.3 requires a 2k±5%  
pulldown resistor on this signal at the MAC. See section 6.5.  
Table 5-4. Detailed Pin Descriptions SPI Interface (4 pins)  
Pin Name  
PIN # Type  
Pin Description  
SCLK  
64  
I
SPI Clock Input.  
SCLK can be any frequency up to 25MHz. By default, SDI and CS_N are  
sampled on the rising edge of SCLK, and SDO is updated on the falling edge of  
SCLK. The edge polarity and phase can be changed using PAGESEL.CPHA  
and CPOL. See section 6.4.  
CS_N  
45  
I
SPI Chip Select.  
This signal must be asserted (low) to read or write internal registers using the  
SPI interface. See section 6.4.  
SDI  
63  
62  
I
SPI Data Input.  
The SPI bus master transmits data to the device on this pin. See section 6.4.  
SDO  
Oz  
SPI Data Output.  
The device transmits data to the SPI bus master on this pin. SDO is high  
impedance until a read command is clocked into the device on the SDI pin. SDO  
then outputs the data values and returns to high impedance. See section 6.4.  
Table 5-5. Detailed Pin Descriptions JTAG Interface (5 pins)  
Pin Name  
PIN # Type  
Pin Description  
JTRST_N  
43  
21  
22  
I
I
I
JTAG Test Reset (active low).  
Asynchronously resets the test access port (TAP) controller. JTRST_N should be  
held low during device power-up. If not used, JTRST_N can be held low or high  
after power-up. See section 8.  
JTCLK  
JTMS  
JTAG Test Clock.  
This clock signal can be any frequency up to 10MHz. JTDI and JTMS are  
sampled on the rising edge of JTCLK, and JTDO is updated on the falling edge  
of JTCLK. If not used, connect to DVDD33 or DVSS. See section 8.  
JTAG Test Mode Select.  
Sampled on the rising edge of JTCLK. Used to place the port into the various  
defined IEEE 1149.1 states. If not used, connect to DVDD33. See section 8.  
11  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Pin Name PIN # Type Pin Description  
JTDI  
23  
I
JTAG Test Data Input.  
Test instructions and data are clocked in on this pin on the rising edge of JTCLK.  
If not used, connect to DVDD33. See section 8.  
JTDO  
44  
Oz  
JTAG Test Data Output.  
Test instructions and data are clocked out on this pin on the falling edge of  
JTCLK. If not used leave unconnected. See section 8.  
Table 5-6. Detailed Pin Descriptions GPIO signals (5 dedicated pins, 4 shared pins)  
Pin Name PIN # Type Pin Description  
GPO1  
24  
IOr  
General Purpose Output 1.  
After reset, default behavior is to output a signal that indicates link status,  
0=link down, 1=link up.  
The function can be changed after reset. See section 6.2.  
GPO2  
GPIO1  
25  
61  
IOr  
General Purpose Output 2.  
After reset, default behavior is to output the CRS (carrier sense) signal.  
The function can be changed after reset. See section 6.2.  
General Purpose Input or Output 1.  
IOz  
After reset this pin can be either high impedance or generating a 125MHz  
clock signal.  
GPO1=0 at reset: After reset, GPIO1 is high impedance.  
GPO1=1 at reset: After reset, GPIO1 is 125MHz clock out  
The function can be changed after reset. See section 6.2.  
General Purpose Input or Output 2.  
After reset this pin is high impedance. The function can be changed after  
reset. See section 6.2.  
General Purpose Input or Output 3.  
After reset this pin is high impedance. The function can be changed after  
reset. See section 6.2.  
GPIO2  
60  
59  
52  
IOz  
IOz  
IOz  
GPIO3  
GPIO4/TXD[4]  
General Purpose Input or Output 4.  
Available for use as a GPIO pin when the parallel interface is configured for  
MII or RGMII modes.  
After reset this pin is high impedance. The function can be changed after  
reset. See section 6.2.  
GPIO5/TXD[5]  
GPIO6/TXD[6]  
GPIO7/TXD[7]  
53  
54  
55  
IOz  
IOz  
IOz  
General Purpose Input or Output 5.  
Available for use as a GPIO pin when the parallel interface is configured for  
MII or RGMII modes.  
After reset this pin is high impedance. The function can be changed after  
reset. See section 6.2.  
General Purpose Input or Output 6.  
Available for use as a GPIO pin when the parallel interface is configured for  
MII or RGMII modes.  
After reset this pin is high impedance. The function can be changed after  
reset. See section 6.2.  
General Purpose Input or Output 7.  
Available for use as a GPIO pin when the parallel interface is configured for  
MII or RGMII modes.  
After reset this pin is high impedance. The function can be changed after  
reset. See section 6.2.  
12  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Table 5-7. Detailed Pin Descriptions SGMII/1000BASE-X Serial Interface (7 pins)  
Pin Name  
TDP,  
TDN  
PIN # Type  
Pin Description  
9
8
Odiff Transmit Data Output  
These pins form a differential CML output for the 1.25Gbaud SGMII transmit  
signal to a neighboring 1000BASE-X optical module (SFP, etc.) or PHY with  
SGMII interface. See section 6.6.  
TCLKP,  
TCLKN  
6
5
Odiff Transmit Clock Output  
These pins form a differential CML output for an optional 625MHz clock for  
the SGMII transmit signal on TDP/TDN. This output is disabled at reset but is  
enabled by setting CR.TCLK_EN=1. See section 6.6.  
RDP,  
RDN  
13  
14  
Idiff  
Receive Data Input  
These pins form a differential input for the 1.25Gbaud SGMII receive signal  
from a neighboring 1000BASE-X optical module (SFP, etc.) or PHY with  
SGMII interface. A receive clock signal is not necessary because the device  
uses a built-in CDR to recover the receive clock from the signal on RDP/RDN.  
See section 6.6.  
ALOS  
19  
I
Analog Loss of Signal  
This pin receives analog loss-of-signal from a neighboring optical transceiver  
module. If the optical module does not have an ALOS output, this pin should  
be connected to DVSS for proper operation. See section 6.6.  
0 = ALOS not detected or not required, normal operation  
1 = ALOS detected, loss of signal  
Table 5-8. Detailed Pin Descriptions Parallel Interface (25 pins)  
Pin Name PIN # Type Pin Description  
RXCLK  
40  
IO  
Receive Clock  
In all modes the frequency tolerance is ± 100 ppm.  
GMII Mode: RXCLK is the 125MHz receive clock.  
RGMII Modes: RXCLK is the 125MHz (RGMII-1000), 25MHz (RGMII-100) or  
2.5MHz (RGMII-10) receive clock (DDR).  
MII Mode: RXCLK is the 25MHz (100Mbps MII) or 2.5MHz (10Mbps MII)  
receive clock.  
In DTE mode (DTE_DCE)=1, RXCLK is an input.  
In DCE mode (DTE_DCE)=0, RXCLK is an output.  
Receive Data Outputs  
During reset these pins are configuration inputs. See section 6.1. After reset  
they are driven as outputs.  
RXD[0]  
RXD[1]  
RXD[2]  
RXD[3]  
RXD[4]  
RXD[5]  
RXD[6]  
RXD[7]  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
32  
31  
IOr  
IOr  
IOr  
IOr  
IOr  
IOr  
IOr  
IOr  
GMII Mode: receive_data[7:0] is output on RXD[7:0] on the rising edge of  
RXCLK.  
MII Mode, RGMII-10 and RGMII-100 Modes: receive_data[3:0] is output on  
RXD[3:0] on the rising edge of RXCLK. RXD[7:4] are high impedance.  
RGMII-1000 Mode: receive_data[3:0] is output on RXD[3:0] on the rising edge  
of RXCLK, and receive_data[7:4] is output on the falling edge of RXCLK.  
RXD[7:4] are high impedance.  
13  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Pin Name  
RX_DV  
PIN # Type  
Pin Description  
29  
IOr  
Receive Data Valid  
During reset this pin is a configuration input. See section 6.1. After reset it is  
driven as an output.  
MII Mode and GMII Mode: RX_DV is output on the rising edge of RXCLK.  
RGMII Modes: The RX_CTL signal is output on RX_DV on both edges of  
RXCLK.  
RX_ER  
28  
27  
IOr  
IOr  
Receive Error  
During reset this pin is a configuration input. See section 6.1. After reset it is  
driven as an output.  
MII Mode and GMII Mode: RX_ER is output on the rising edge of RXCLK.  
RGMII Mode: RX_ER pin is high impedance.  
Collision Detect  
COL  
During reset this pin is a configuration input. See section 6.1. After reset it is  
driven as an output.  
COL indicates that a Tx/Rx collision is occurring. It is meaningful only in half  
duplex operation. It is asynchronous to any of the clocks. COL is driven low at  
all times when BMCR.DLB=1 and BMCR.COL_TEST=0. When BMCR.DLB=1  
and BMCR.COL_TEST=1, COL behaves as described in the COL_TEST bit  
description.  
1 = Collision is occurring  
0 = Collision is not occurring  
CRS  
26  
46  
IOr  
IO  
Carrier Sense  
During reset this pin is a configuration input. See section 6.1. After reset it is  
driven as an output.  
CRS is asserted by the device when either the transmit data path or the  
receive data path is active. This signal is asynchronous to any of the clocks.  
MII Transmit Clock  
TXCLK  
When TXCLK is an input, frequency tolerance is ±100ppm.  
MII Mode: TXCLK is the 25MHz (100Mbps MII) or 2.5MHz 10Mbps MII)  
transmit clock.  
In DTE mode (DTE_DCE)=1, TXCLK is an input.  
In DCE mode (DTE_DCE)=0, TXCLK is an output.  
GMII Mode and RGMII Mode: TXCLK can output a 125MHz clock for use by  
neighboring components (e.g. a MAC) when GMIICR.TXCLK_EN=1 (or  
TXCLK=1 at reset).  
GTXCLK  
66  
I
GMII/RGMII Transmit Clock  
In all modes the frequency tolerance is ± 100ppm.  
GMII Mode: GTXCLK is the 125MHz transmit clock.  
RGMII Modes: GTXCLK is the 125MHz (RGMII-1000), 25MHz (RGMII-100)  
or 2.5MHz (RGMII-10) transmit clock (DDR).  
MII Mode: This pin is not used and should be pulled low. See the TXCLK pin  
description.  
14  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Pin Name  
TXD[0]  
PIN # Type  
Pin Description  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
I
I
Transmit Data Inputs  
Depending on the parallel MII interface mode, four or eight of these pins are  
used to accept transmit data from a neighboring component.  
TXD[1]  
TXD[2]  
I
GMII Mode: The rising edge of GTXCLK latches transmit_data[7:0] from  
TXD[7:0].  
TXD[3]  
I
MII Mode, RGMII-10 and RGMII-100 Modes: The rising edge of TXCLK (MII)  
or GTXCLK (RGMII) latches transmit_data[3:0] from TXD[3:0].  
TXD[7:4] become GPIO7 GPIO4.  
TXD[4]/GPIO4  
TXD[5]/GPIO5  
TXD[6]/GPIO6  
IOz  
IOz  
IOz  
RGMII-1000 Mode: The rising edge of GTXCLK latches transmit_data[3:0]  
from TXD[3:0]. The falling edge of GTXCLK latches transmit_data[7:4] from  
TXD[3:0].  
TXD[7]/GPIO7  
TX_EN  
55  
57  
IOz  
I
TXD[7:4] become GPIO7 GPIO4.  
Transmit Enable  
MII Mode and GMII Mode: The rising edge of TXCLK (MII) or GTXCLK (GMII)  
latches the TX_EN signal from this pin.  
RGMII Modes: Both edges of GTXCLK latch the TX_CTL signal from this pin.  
TX_ER  
58  
I
Transmit Error  
MII Mode and GMII Mode: The rising edge of TXCLK (MII) or GTXCLK (GMII)  
latches the TX_ER signal from this pin.  
RGMII Modes: This pin is not used.  
Table 5-9. Detailed Pin Descriptions Power and Ground Pins (15 pins)  
Pin Name  
PIN #  
Pin Description  
DVDD12  
30, 56  
Digital Power Supply, 1.2V (2 pins)  
DVDD33  
DVSS  
RVDD12  
RVDD33  
RVSS  
TVDD12  
TVDD33  
TVSS  
CVDD12  
CVDD33  
CVSS  
20, 39, 65 Digital Power Supply, 3.3V  
47  
16  
12  
15  
11  
7
Return for DVDD12 and DVDD33  
1.25G Receiver Analog Power Supply, 1.2V  
1.25G Receiver Analog Power Supply, 3.3V  
Return for RVDD12 and RVDD33  
1.25G Transmitter Analog Power Supply, 1.2V  
1.25G Transmitter Analog Power Supply, 3.3V  
Return for TVDD12 and TVDD33  
10  
3
TX PLL Analog Power Supply, 1.2V  
2
TX PLL Analog Power Supply, 3.3V  
4
Return for CVDD12 and CVDD33  
GVDD12  
GVSS  
18  
1
Analog Power Supply, 1.2V  
Return for GVDD12.  
Exposed pad (die paddle). Connect to ground plane. EP also functions as a  
heatsink. Solder to the circuit-board ground plane to maximize thermal  
dissipation.  
Exposed Pad  
EP  
15  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
6. Functional Description  
6.1  
Pin Configuration During Reset  
The MAX24288 initial configuration is determined by pins that are sampled at reset. The values on these pins are  
used to set the reset values of several register bits.  
The pins that are sampled at reset to pin-configure the device are listed described in Table 6-1. During reset these  
pins are high-impedance inputs and require 10kpullup or pulldown resistors to set pin-configuration values. After  
reset, the pins can become outputs if configured to do so and operate as configured. There are two pin  
configuration modes: 15-pin mode and 3-pin mode.  
In 15-pin mode (COL=0 during reset, see Table 6-1) all major settings associated with the PCS block are  
configurable. In addition, the input reference clock frequency on the REFCLK pin is configured during reset using  
the RXD[3:2] pins.  
Table 6-1. Reset Configuration Pins, 15-Pin Mode (COL=0)  
Pin  
CRS  
Function  
Double Date Rate  
Register Bit Affected  
GMIICR.DDR=CRS  
Notes  
See Table 6-2.  
0=DCE, 1=DTE  
10/100 MII: DTE or DCE  
10/100 MII: GMIICR.DTE_DCE (serial interface is configured for  
SGMII mode, PCSCR.BASEX=0)  
GPO2  
Other: Serial Interface  
GPIO1 Configuration  
Parallel Interface Speed  
REFCLK Frequency  
Other: PCSCR.BASEX  
GPIOCR1.GPIO1_SEL[2]  
GMIICR.SPD[1:0]  
0=SGMII, 1=1000BASE=X  
0=high impedance  
1=125MHz from TX PLL  
GPO1  
RXD[1:0]  
RXD[3:2]  
See Table 6-2.  
00=10MHz, 01=12.8MHz,  
10=25MHz, 11=125MHz  
Note: PHYAD[4:0]=11111 enables  
None  
RXD[7:4]  
RX_ER  
RX_DV  
MDIO PHYAD[3:0].  
MDIO PHYAD[4].  
Other: Auto-negotiation  
Internal MDIO PHYAD register  
(device address on MDIO bus). factory test mode. Do not use.  
BMCR.AN_EN  
0=Disable, 1=Enable  
0=high impedance  
TXCLK  
TXCLK Enable  
GMIICR.TXCLK_EN  
1=125MHz from TX PLL  
Ignored in MII mode  
Table 6-2. Parallel Interface Configuration  
SPD[1] SPD[0]  
Speed  
10Mbps  
100Mbps  
1000Mbps  
DDR=0  
MII  
MII  
GMII  
reserved  
DDR=1  
RGMII-10  
RGMII-100  
RGMII-1000  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
In 3-pin mode (COL=1 during reset, see Table 6-3) the device is configured for a 1000Mbps RGMII or GMII parallel  
interface. This mode is targeted to the application of connecting an ASIC, FPGA or processor with an RGMII or  
GMII interface to a switch device with an SGMII interface or to a 1000BASE-X optical interface. In 3-pin mode, the  
REFCLK pin is configured for 25MHz, the MDIO interface is enabled (with PHY address set to 0x04), the SPI  
interface is enabled, 1000BASE-X auto-negotiation (or automatic transmission of SGMII control information) is  
enabled, TXCLK is configured to output a 125MHz clock, and the TCLKP/TCLKN differential pair is disabled. Note:  
if RX_ER and RXD[7:4] are all high when the device exits reset then the device enters factory test mode; for  
normal operation set these pins to any other combination of values.  
16  
 
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Table 6-3. Reset Configuration Pins, 3-Pin Mode (COL=1)  
Pin  
CRS  
GPO2  
Function  
Double Date Rate  
Serial Interface  
Register Bit Affected  
GMIICR.DDR=CRS  
PCSCR.BASEX  
Notes  
0=GMII, 1=RGMII  
0=SGMII, 1=1000BASE=X  
Note: In 3-pin mode register fields are automatically set as follows: REFCLK clock rate to 25MHz, GMIICR.SPD[1:0]=10, MDIO PHYAD is set to  
0x04, BMCR.AN_EN=1, GMIICR.TXCLK_EN=1, GPIOCR1=0 and GPIOCR2=0. All other registers are reset to normal defaults listed in the  
register descriptions.  
6.2  
General-Purpose I/O  
The MAX24288 has two general-purpose output pins, GPO1, GPO2, and seven general-purpose input/output pins,  
GPIO1 through GPIO7. Each pin can be configured to drive low or high or be in a high-impedance state. Other  
uses for the GPO and GPIO pins are listed in Table 6-4 through Table 6-6. The GPO and GPIO pins are each  
configured using a GPxx_SEL field in registers GPIOCR1 or GPIOCR2 with values as indicated in the tables  
below.  
When a GPIO pin is configured as high impedance it can be used as an input. The real-time state of GPIOx can be  
read from GPIOSR.GPIOx. In addition, a latched status bit GPIOSR.GPIOxL is available for each GPIO pin. This  
latched status bit is set when the transition specified by GPIOCR2.GPIO13_LSC (for GPIO1 through GPIO3) or by  
GPIOCR2.GPIO47_LSC (for GPIO4 through GPIO7) occurs on the pin.  
Note that GPIO4 through GPIO7 are alternate pin functions to TXD[7:4] and therefore are only available when the  
parallel MII is configured for MII or RGMII.  
Table 6-4. GPO1, GPIO1 and GPIO3 Configuration Options  
GPxx_SEL  
000  
Description  
High impedance, not driven, can be used as an input  
Drive logic 0  
001  
010  
Drive logic 1  
011  
100  
101  
Interrupt output, active low. GPO1 drives low and high, GPIO1 and GPIO3 are open-drain.  
Output 125MHz from the reference clock PLL  
Output 25MHz or 125MHz from receive clock recovery PLL. Not squelched. Frequency specified  
by CR.RCFREQ.  
110  
111  
Output real-time link status, 0=link down, 1=link up  
Output PEG1 signal from 1588 event generator  
Table 6-5. GPO2 and GPIO2 Configuration Options  
GPxx_SEL  
Description  
000  
001  
010  
011  
100  
High impedance, not driven, can be used as an input  
Drive logic 0  
Drive logic 1  
Output the PTP_CLKO signal from 1588 time engine  
Output 125MHz from reference clock PLL  
101  
Output 25MHz or 125MHz from receive clock recovery PLL. The frequency is specified by  
CR.RCFREQ. Signal is automatically squelched (driven low) when CR.RCSQL=1 and any of  
several conditions occur. See section 6.2.1.  
110  
111  
Output CRS (carrier sense) status  
Output PEG2 signal  
17  
 
 
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Table 6-6. GPIO4, GPIO5, GPIO6 and GPIO7 Configuration Options  
GPxx_SEL  
000  
Description  
High impedance, not driven, can be used as an input  
Drive logic 0  
001  
010  
Drive logic 1  
011  
100  
101  
Output the PTP_CLKO signal from 1588 time engine  
Output 125MHz from reference clock PLL  
Output 25MHz or 125MHz from receive clock recovery PLL. The frequency is specified by  
CR.RCFREQ. Signal is automatically squelched (driven low) when CR.RCSQL=1 and any of  
several conditions occur. See section 6.2.1.  
Output PEG1 signal  
110  
111  
Output PEG2 signal  
6.2.1 Receive Recovered Clock Squelch Criteria  
A 25MHz or 125MHz clock from the receive clock recovery PLL can be output on any of GPO2, GPIO2 and  
GPIO4-7. When CR.RCSQL=1, this clock is squelched (driven low) when any of the following conditions occur:  
IR.ALOS=1 (analog loss-of-signal occurred)  
IR.RLOS=1 (CDR loss-of-signal occurred))  
IR.RLOL=1 (CDR PLL loss-of-lock occurred)  
IR.LINK_ST=0 (auto-negotiation link down occurred, latched low)  
Since each of these criteria is a latched status bit, the output clock signal remains squelched until all of these  
latched status bits go inactive (as described in section 7.2).  
6.3  
Reset, Power Down and Processor Interrupt  
6.3.1 Reset  
The following reset functions are available in the device:  
1. Hardware reset pin (RST_N): This pin asynchronously resets all logic, state machines and registers in the  
device except the JTAG logic. When the RST_N pin is low, all internal registers are reset to their default  
values. Pin states are sampled and used to set the default values of several register fields as described in  
section 6.1. RST_N should be asserted for at least 100s.  
2. Global reset bit, GPIOCR1.RST: Setting this bit is equivalent to asserting the RST_N pin. This bit is self-  
clearing.  
3. (MDIO interface only) Datapath reset bit, BMCR.DP_RST. This bit resets the entire datapath from parallel MII  
interface through PCS encoder and decoder including the packet classifier and modifier blocks. It also resets  
the deserializer and transmit and receive start-of-packet detectors. It does not reset any registers, GPIO logic,  
the TX PLL or any block reset by PTPCR1.TE_RST. The DP_RST bit is self-clearing.  
4. Time engine reset bit, PTPCR1.TE_RST. This bit resets the logic of the 1588 time engine, output clock  
generator, programmable event generators, timestampers and GPIO. It does not reset any registers, GPIO  
logic, the TX PLL or any block reset by BMCR.DP_RST. The TE_RST bit is self-clearing.  
5. JTAG reset pin JTRST_N. This pin resets the JTAG logic. See section 8 for details about JTAG operation.  
TE_RST does not affect the datapath or packet traffic.  
18  
 
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
6.3.2 Power Down  
When sections of the MAX24288 are not used, they can be powered down to reduce power consumption.  
The transmit serializer and the TDP/TDN and TCLKP/TCLN output drivers can be powered down by setting  
PTPCR1.TX_PWDN=1. In this mode, the output drivers are placed in a high-impedance state, and the pins are  
pulled up to 3.3V by their internal 50termination resistors. See section 6.6.  
The RDP/RDN inputs, the clock and data recovery PLL, and the de-serializer can be powered down by setting  
PTPCR1.RX_PWDN=1.  
The parallel MII (section 6.7), the PCS encoder and decoder and all other parallel datapath logic, both receive and  
transmit, except the packet classifiers and packet modifiers can be powered down by setting  
PTPCR1.DP_PWDN=1.  
The packet classifiers (section 6.13.6) and packet modifiers (6.13.7) can be powered down by setting  
PTPCR1.PKT_PWDN=1.  
The time engine (section 6.13.1), output clock generator (6.13.2), PEGs (6.13.3) and timestampers (6.13.4) can be  
disabled by setting PTPCR1.TE_PWDN=1.  
Finally, the TX PLL (section 6.10.2) can be powered down and bypassed by setting PTPCR1.PLL_PWDN=1.  
Because the serializer, transmit driver, receive CDR and deserializer do not get the high-speed clocks they need  
when the TX PLL is disabled, those blocks must be disabled when PLL_PWDN=1 by setting  
PTPCR1.TX_PWDN=1 and PTPCR1.RX_PWDN=1. In addition, if the frequency of the REFCLK signal is less than  
125MHz, all internal logic is clocked at a slower rate, including the MDIO and SPI interfaces. The maximum clock  
rates for MDIO and SPI are reduced by a factor of (REFCLK_freq / 125MHz).  
In addition, when the TX PLL is powered down, the time engine accumulator (Figure 6-13) is clocked directly from  
the REFCLK signal. Therefore, the uncertainty of timestamping and PEG edge placement is half a REFCLK cycle  
(vs. ~1ns when using the TX PLL).  
Deasserting a PWDN bit causes the affected circuitry to be reset as described in section 6.3.1.  
6.3.3 Processor Interrupts  
Any of pins GPO1, GPIO1 and GPIO3 can be configured as an active low interrupt output by setting the  
appropriate field in GPIOCR1 to 011. GPO1 drives high and low while GPIO1 and GPIO3 are open-drain and  
require pullup resistors.  
Status bits than can cause an interrupt are located in the IR and PTP_IR registers. The corresponding interrupt  
enable bits are located in the IR and PTP_IE registers. Both the PAGESEL register and the PTP_IR register have  
top-level IR AND PTP_IR status bits to indicate which registers have active interrupt sources. The PAGESEL  
register is available on all pages through the MDIO interface, allowing the interrupt routine to read the register  
without changing the MDIO page.  
6.4  
SPI - Serial Processor Interface  
The MAX24288's SPI interface consists of four signals: serial clock (SCLK), serial data in (SDI), serial data out  
(SDO), and chip select (CS_N, active low). SPI is a widely-used master/slave bus protocol that allows a master  
device and one or more slave devices to communicate using only four wires. The MAX24288 is always a slave  
device. Masters are typically microprocessors, ASICs or FPGAs. Data transfers are always initiated by the master  
device, which also generates the SCLK signal. The MAX24288 receives serial data on the SDI pin and transmits  
serial data on the SDO pin. SDO is high impedance except when the MAX24288 is transmitting data to the bus  
master. At the maximum SPI clock frequency of 25MHz each non-burst read or write access takes approximately  
1μs.  
19  
 
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
The SPI interface is enabled at reset but can be disabled by setting the PAGESEL.SPI_DIS register bit. (Note: the  
PAGESEL register can only be accessed using the MDIO interface). When the SPI bus is enabled, all of the  
IEEE1588 registers are mapped to the SPI register space as shown in Table 7-2. When the SPI bus is disabled, all  
of the IEEE1588 registers are mapped to pages 1, 2 and 3 of the MDIO register space as shown in Table 7-2. The  
MAX24288 accepts SPI commands with a 6-bit address field and therefore its SPI register space is 0 to 0x3F.  
Registers are 16 bits wide.  
Clock Polarity and Phase. SCLK polarity and phase can be changed using the CPOL and CPHA bits of the  
PAGESEL register. The CPOL bit defines the polarity of SCLK. When CPOL=0, SCLK is normally low and pulses  
high during bus transactions. When CPOL = 1, SCLK is normally high and pulses low during bus transactions. The  
CPHA bit sets the phase (active edge) of SCLK. When CPHA = 0, data is latched in on SDI on the leading edge of  
the SCLK pulse and updated on SDO on the trailing edge. When CPHA = 1, data is latched in on SDI on the  
trailing edge of the SCLK pulse and updated on SDO on the following leading edge. SCLK does not have to toggle  
between accesses, i.e., when CS_N is high. See Figure 6-1.  
Device Selection. Normally each SPI device has its own chip-select line. The MAX24288 is selected when its  
CS_N pin is low. The MAX24288 also supports an alternate device selection method where multiple MAX24288  
devices share the same chip-select line. See Design Option: Shared Chip Select below for details. When CS_N is  
de-asserted the SDO signal is high impedance, and any incomplete transfer cycle is aborted. This behavior is  
asynchronous to the SCLK signal. The CS_N signal can stay asserted for the duration of multiple read and write  
cycles. The transition of CS_N from de-asserted to asserted defines the start of a cycle or multiple cycles.  
Control Word. After CS_N is pulled low, the bus master transmits the control word during the first eight SCLK  
cycles. By default the 8-bit control word is sent with address MSb first: R/W A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 BURST. When  
PAGESEL.SPISWAP=1 the control word is sent with address LSb first: R/W A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 BURST where  
A[5:0] is the register address, R/W is the data direction bit (1=read, 0=write), and BURST is the burst bit (1=burst  
access, 0=single-word access). In the discussion that follows, a control word with R/W = 1 is a read control word,  
while a control word with R/W = 0 is a write control word.  
Data Word. By default, 16-bit data words are sent MSb first. When PAGESEL.SPISWAP=1 data words are sent  
LSb first.  
Single-Word Writes. See Figure 6-2. After CS_N goes low, the bus master transmits a write control word with  
BURST = 0 followed by the 16-bit word to be written. The data word is transferred to the register after the last data  
bit is sampled. If CS_N stays asserted the next word must be a control word.  
Single-Word Reads. See Figure 6-2. After CS_N goes low, the bus master transmits a read control word with  
BURST = 0. The MAX24288 then responds with the requested 16-bit data word. When CS_N stays asserted the  
next word must be a control word.  
Burst Writes. See Figure 6-2. After CS_N goes low, the bus master transmits a write control word with BURST = 1  
followed by the first 16-bit data word to be written. The MAX24288 receives the first data word on SDI, writes it to  
the specified register, increments its internal address register, and prepares to receive the next data word. If the  
master continues to transmit, the MAX24288 continues to write the data received and increment its address  
counter. After the address counter reaches 1Fh it rolls over to address 00h and continues to increment. The bus  
master must terminate the transaction by pulling CS_N high after the last data word.  
Burst Reads. See Figure 6-2. After CS_N goes low, the bus master transmits a read control word with BURST = 1.  
The MAX24288 then responds with the requested data word on SDO, increments its address counter, and  
prefetches the next data word. If the bus master continues to demand data, the MAX24288 continues to provide  
the data on SDO, increment its address counter, and prefetch the following word. After the address counter  
reaches 1Fh it rolls over to address 00h and continues to increment. The bus master must terminate the  
transaction by pulling CS_N high after the last data word. NOTE: The prefetch mentioned above can have the  
unintended effect of clearing latched status bits. Care should be taken to not terminate a burst read on the address  
prior to a register with latched status bits.  
Early Termination of Bus Transactions. The bus master can terminate SPI bus transactions at any time by  
pulling CS_N high. In response to early terminations, the MAX24288 resets its SPI interface logic and waits for the  
20  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
start of the next transaction. If a write transaction is terminated prior to the SCLK edge that latches the LSb of a  
data word, the word is not written.  
Design Option: Wiring SDI and SDO Together. Because communication between the bus master and the  
MAX24288 is half-duplex, the SDI and SDO pins can be wired together externally to reduce wire count. To support  
this option, the bus master must not drive the SDI/SDO line when the MAX24288 is driving SDI/SDO. When SDI  
and SDO are tied together the CS_N signal must be de-asserted between commands.  
Design Option: Shared Chip Select. Multiple MAX24288 devices can be configured to use a shared chip-select  
pin. In this mode of operation, each MAX24288 uses its MDIO PHY address (latched at reset as described in  
section 6.1) as its unique SPI device address. To read or write just one of the MAX24288 devices, the SPI bus  
master asserts the common CS_N pin and writes the device address and ENABLE=1 to the PHY_MATCH register.  
Each MAX24288 device performs this write to its PHY_MATCH register simultaneously and compares its device  
address to the PHY_MATCH address. When PHY_MATCH.ENABLE=1, only the MAX24288 whose device  
address matches the PHY_MATCH address responds to read and write commands on the SPI bus.  
To access all MAX24288 devices simultaneously, the SPI bus master writes ENABLE=0 to the PHY_MATCH  
register. This causes all MAX24288 devices on the bus to respond to read and write commands on the SPI bus.  
Reading all devices at the same time is not useful, but writing all devices at the same time can be useful when all  
need the same configuration settings.  
AC Timing. See Table 9-21 and Figure 9-4 for AC timing specifications for the SPI interface.  
Figure 6-1. SPI Clock Polarity and Phase Options  
CS*  
SCK  
CPOL = 0, CPHA = 0  
SCK  
CPOL = 0, CPHA = 1  
SCK  
CPOL = 1, CPHA = 0  
SCK  
CPOL = 1, CPHA = 1  
SDI/SDO  
MSB  
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB  
CLOCK EDGE USED FOR DATA CAPTURE (ALL MODES)  
21  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Figure 6-2. SPI Bus Transactions  
Single-Word Write  
CS_N  
R/W Register Address Burst Data Word  
SDI  
0 (Write)  
0 (single)  
SDO  
Single-Word Read  
CS_N  
R/W Register Address Burst  
SDI  
1 (Read)  
0 (single)  
SDO  
Data Word  
Burst Write  
CS_N  
R/W Register Address Burst Data Word 1  
Data Word N  
SDI  
0 (Write)  
1 (burst)  
SDO  
Burst Read  
CS_N  
R/W Register Address Burst  
SDI  
1 (Read)  
1 (burst)  
Data Word 1  
Data Word N  
SDO  
22  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
6.5  
MDIO Interface  
6.5.1 MDIO Overview  
The MAX24288's MDIO interface is compliant to IEEE 802.3 clause 22. MAX24288 always behaves as a PHY on  
the MDIO bus. Because MAX24288 is not a complete PHY but rather a device that sits between a MAC and a  
PHY, it implements only a subset of the registers and register fields specified in 802.3 clause 22 as shown in the  
table below.  
MDIO  
Address  
MAX24288  
Name  
802.3 Name  
0
1
Control  
Status  
BMCR  
BMSR  
2, 3  
4
5
6
15  
PHY Identifier  
ID1, ID2  
AN_ADV  
AN_RX  
AN_EXP  
EXT_STAT  
Auto-Negotiation Advertisement  
Auto-Negotiation Link Partner Base Page Ability  
Auto-Negotiation Expansion  
Extended Status  
The MDIO consists of a bidirectional, half-duplex serial data signal (MDIO) and a 12.5MHz clock signal (MDC)  
driven by a bus master, usually a MAC. The format of management frames transmitted over the MDIO interface is  
shown below (see IEEE 802.3 clause 22.2.4.5 for more information). MDIO DC electrical characteristics are listed  
in section 9.2.1. AC electrical characteristics are listed in section 9.3.6. The MAX24288's MDIO slave state  
machine is shown in Figure 6-3.  
Management Frame Fields  
PRE  
ST OP PHYAD REGAD TA DATA IDLE  
READ Command  
WRITE Command  
32 ‘1’s 01 10 AAAAA RRRRR Z0 16-bit  
32 ‘1’s 01 01 AAAAA RRRRR 10 16-bit  
Z
Z
The transmission and reception bit order is MSB first for the PHYAD, REGAD and DATA fields  
MAX24288 supports preamble suppression. This allows quicker bursts of read and write transfers to occur by  
shortening the minimum transfer cycle time from 65 clock periods to 33 clock periods. There must be at least a  
32-bit preamble on the first transfer after reset, but on subsequent transfers the preamble can be suppressed or  
shortened. When the preamble is completely suppressed the 0 in the ST symbol follows the single IDLE Z, which is  
one clock period duration.  
Like any MDIO slave, MAX24288 only performs the read or write operation specified if the PHYAD bits of the MDIO  
command match the device PHY address. The device PHY address is latched during device reset from the  
RXD[7:4] and RX_ER pins. See section 6.1.  
The MAX24288 does not support the 802.3 clause 45 MDIO extensions. Management frames with ST bits other  
than 01 or OP bits other than 01 or 10 are ignored and put the device in a state where it ignores the MDIO traffic  
until it sees a full preamble (32 ones). If Clause 45 ICs and the MAX24288 are connected to the same MDIO  
management interface, the station management entity must put a full preamble on the bus after communicating  
with clause 45 ICs before communicating with the MAX24288.  
23  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Figure 6-3. MDIO Slave State Machine  
HW RESET  
PREAMBLE  
INIT  
MDIO=Z  
32 consecutive 1s  
PREAMBLE  
/ IDLE  
MDIO=Z  
0
1
0
ST 2nd bit  
MDIO=Z  
1
00 or 11  
OP 2 bits  
MDIO=Z  
24 clocks  
01 or 10  
No match  
PHYAD 5 bits  
MDIO=Z  
NOT PHY  
MDIO=Z  
match  
19 clocks  
No match  
REGAD 5 bits  
MDIO=Z  
NOT REG  
MDIO=Z  
OP=10 (read)  
OP=01 (write)  
TA 2 bits  
MDIO=Z  
TA-Z  
MDIO=Z  
TA-0  
MDIO=0  
DATA 16 bits  
MDIO=Z  
16 clocks  
DATA 16 bits  
MDIO=D[15:0]  
16 clocks  
IDLE  
MDIO=Z  
24  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
6.5.2 Examples of MAX24288 and PHY Management Using MDIO  
The MDIO interface can control both the Ethernet PHY functions and the IEEE1588 functions of the MAX24288.  
The Ethernet functions (PCS, PMA, auto-negotiation, parallel and serial MIIs) can only be controlled using the  
MDIO interface. The IEEE1588 functions can be controlled using either the MDIO interface or the SPI interface  
(section 6.4). The PAGESEL.SPI_DIS bit selects which interface controls the IEEE1588 functions.  
The MDIO interface is typically provided by the MAC function within a neighboring processor, ASIC or FPGA  
component. It can be used to configure the registers in the MAX24288 and/or the registers in a PHY or switch chip  
connected to the MAX24288 via the SGMII interface.  
Case 1 in Figure 6-4 shows a typical application where the MAX24288 connects a MAC with a 3-speed RGMII  
interface to a 3-speed PHY with an SGMII interface. Through the MDIO interface, system software configures the  
MAX24288 and optionally the PHY. (The PHY may not need to be configured if it is operating in a hardware-only  
auto-negotiation 1000BASE-T mode). After initial configuration and after the PHY auto-negotiates link details with  
its 1000BASE-T link partner, the speed and mode are transferred to the MAX24288 over the SGMII interface as  
specified in the SGMII specification and are available in the MAX24288 AN_RX register. The processor reads this  
information and configures the MAC and the MAX24288 to match the mode the PHY is in.  
Figure 6-4. Management Information Flow Options, Case 1,Tri-Mode PHY  
Transfer Speed Control  
Acknowledge Speed Control  
RGMII  
SGMII  
RXD[3:0]  
10BASE-T  
100BASE-T  
1000BASE-T  
PHY  
RX_CLK  
2.5/25/125MHz  
CDR  
MAX24288  
RD  
MAC  
(RGMII)  
TXD[3:0]  
TD  
GTX_CLK  
TCLK  
2.5/25/125MHz  
625MHz  
MDIO  
Case 2 in Figure 6-5 shows a typical application where the MAX24288 connects a MAC with a GMII interface to an  
SGMII switch chip. Through the MDIO interface, system software configures the MAX24288 to match the MAC  
mode and writes the MAX24288's AN_ADV register to also match the MAC mode. The MAX24288 then transfers  
the speed and mode over the SGMII interface as specified in the SGMII specification. The switch chip receives this  
information and configures its port to match.  
Figure 6-5. Management Information Flow Options, Case 2, SGMII Switch Chip  
Transfer Speed Control  
Acknowledge Speed Control  
GMII  
SGMII  
RXD[7:0]  
RX_CLK  
125MHz  
CDR  
MAX24288  
RD  
TD  
Switch  
Chip  
MAC  
TXD[7:0]  
(GMII)  
GTX_CLK  
125MHz  
MDIO  
Case 3 in Figure 6-6 shows a typical application where the MAX24288 connects a MAC with a GMII interface to an  
optical interface. In this case the MAX24288 provides the 1000BASE-X PCS and PMA functions for the optical  
interface. Through the MDIO interface, system software configures the MAX24288 to match the MAC mode, both  
25  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
of which need to be 1000 Mbps speed. The MAX24288 then auto-negotiates with its link partner. This 1000BASE-  
X auto-negotiation is primarily to establish the pause functionality of the link. The MAX24288's auto-negotiation  
support is described in section 6.8.  
Figure 6-6. Management Information Flow Options, Case 3, 1000BASE-X Interface  
1000BASE-X Auto-negotiation  
GMII  
1000BASE-X  
RXD[7:0]  
RX_CLK  
125MHz  
CDR  
MAX24288  
RD  
Optical  
MAC  
TXD[7:0]  
Interface  
TD  
(GMII)  
GTX_CLK  
125MHz  
(e.g. SFP Module)  
MDIO  
26  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
6.6  
Serial Interface 1000BASE-X or SGMII  
The high-speed serial interface is compatible with the specification of the 1000BASE-CX PMD service interface  
TP1 as defined in 802.3 clause 39. It is also compatible with the specification of the SGMII interface and can  
connect to optical PMD modules in 1000BASE-SX/LX interfaces.  
On this interface the MAX24288 transmits a 1250Mbaud differential signal on the TDP/TDN output pins. DDR  
clocking is used, and the transmit interface outputs a 625MHz differential clock signal on the TCLKP/TCLKN output  
pins. In the receive direction the clock and data recovery (CDR) block recovers both clock and data from the  
incoming 1250Mbaud signal on RDP/RDN. A separate receive clock signal is not needed.  
Signal Format, Coupling, Termination. The serial interface passes data at 1.25 Gbaud using a CML differential  
output and an any-format differential input. The CML TDP/TDN outputs have internal 50pullup resistors to  
TVDD33. The differential input RDP/RDN does not have internal termination, and an external 100termination  
resistor between RDP and RDN is recommended. The high-speed serial interface pins are typically connected with  
neighboring components using AC coupling as shown in Figure 6-7.  
Figure 6-7. Recommended External Components for High-Speed Serial Interface  
TVDD33  
RVDD33  
MAX24288  
MAX24288  
50  
50  
50  
50  
+
Signal  
Destination  
Signal  
Source  
100  
100  
Receiver  
-
CML  
Driver  
16mA  
Receive Loss-of-Signal. The device's receiver logic has an ALOS input pin through which analog loss-of-signal  
(ALOS) can be received from a neighboring optical transceiver module, if the high-speed serial signal is  
transmitted/received optically. The IR.ALOS bit is set when the ALOS pin goes high. ALOS can cause an interrupt  
if enabled by IR.ALOS_IE.  
In addition, the clock-and-data recovery block (CDR) indicates loss-of-signal when it does not detect any transitions  
in 24 bit times. The IR.RLOS latched status bit is set when the CDR indicates loss-of-signal. RLOS can cause an  
interrupt if enabled by IR.RLOS_IE.  
Receive Loss-of-Lock. The receive clock PLL in the CDR locks to the recovered clock from the RDP/RDN pins  
and produces several receive-side clock signals. If the receive clock PLL loses lock, it sets IR.RLOL, which can  
cause an interrupt if enabled by IR.RLOL_IE.  
Transmit Clock. The TCLKP/TCLKN differential output can be enabled and disabled using CR.TCLK_EN.  
Disabled means the output drivers for TCLKP and TCLKN are disabled (high impedance) and the internal 50  
termination resistors pull both TCLKP and TCLKN up to 3.3V.  
Transmit Power Down. The serial interface transmitter is powered down by setting PTPCR1.TX_PWDN=1. See  
section 6.3.2.  
DC Electrical Characteristics. See section 9.2.2.  
AC Electrical Characteristics. See section 9.3.3.  
27  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
6.7  
Parallel Interface GMII, RGMII, MII  
The parallel interface can be configured as GMII or MII compliant to IEEE 802.3 clauses 35 and 22, respectively. It  
can also be configured as reduced pin count RGMII compliant to the HP document RGMII Version 1.3 12/10/2000.  
A summary of the parallel interface modes is shown in Table 6-7 below.  
Table 6-7. Parallel Interface Modes  
Baud Rate,  
Mbps  
1000  
1000  
100  
Data Transfer Per Cycle,  
# of Wires Per Direction  
8-bit data, 8 wires  
8-bit data, 4 wires, DDR  
4-bit data, 4 wires  
4-bit data, 4 wires  
4-bit data, 4 wires  
4-bit data, 4 wires  
4-bit data, 4 wires  
Full  
Duplex  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Half  
Duplex  
No  
Mode  
GMII  
RGMII-1000  
RGMII-100  
RGMII-10  
MII-100 DCE  
MII-10 DCE  
MII-100 DTE  
MII-10 DTE  
Transmit Clock  
Input, 125MHz  
Input, 125MHz  
Input, 25MHz  
Input, 2.5MHz  
Output, 25MHz  
Output, 2.5MHz  
Input, 25MHz  
Input ,2.5MHz  
Receive Clock  
Output, 125MHz  
Output, 125MHz  
Output 25MHz  
Output, 2.5MHz  
Output, 25MHz  
Output, 2.5MHz  
Input, 25MHz  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
10  
100  
10  
100  
10  
4-bit data, 4 wires  
Input, 2.5MHz  
Yes  
The parallel interface mode is controlled by GMIICR.SPD[1:0]. MII options are specified by GMIICR.DTE_DCE.  
6.7.1 GMII Mode  
The MAX24288's GMII interface is compliant to IEEE 802.3 clause 35 but only operates full duplex. Half duplex  
operation is not supported, and the TX_ER pin is ignored. The PHY therefore does not receive the following from  
the MAC: carrier extend, carrier extend error, and transmit error propagation as described in 802.3 section  
35.2.1.6, section 35.2.2.5 and Table 35-1. These features are not needed for full duplex operation.  
The parallel interface can be configured for GMII mode using software configuration or pin configuration at reset.  
For pin configuration (see section 6.1) one of the following combinations of pin states must be present during  
device reset:  
COL=0, RXD[1:0]=10, CRS=0  
COL=1, CRS=0  
For software configuration, the following register fields must be set: GMIICR.SPD[1:0]=10 and GMIICR.DDR=0.  
See IEEE 802.3 clause 35 for functional timing diagrams. GMII DC electrical characteristics are listed in section  
9.2.1. AC electrical characteristics are listed in section 9.3.4 and 9.3.5.  
Table 6-8. GMII Parallel Bus Pin Naming  
Pin Name  
RXCLK  
RXD[7:0]  
RX_DV  
RX_ER  
CRS  
802.3 Pin Name  
RX_CLK  
RXD[7:0]  
RX_DV  
RX_ER  
CRS  
Function  
Receive 125MHz clock output  
Receive data output  
Receive data valid output  
Receive data error output  
Receive carrier sense  
COL  
TXCLK  
COL  
---  
Receive collision (held low in GMII mode)  
Outputs 125MHz from the TX PLL for use by the MAC when  
GMIICR.TXCLK_EN=1.  
GTXCLK  
TXD[7:0]  
TX_EN  
GTX_CLK  
TXD[7:0]  
TX_EN  
Transmit 125MHz clock input  
Transmit data input  
Transmit data enable input  
Transmit data error input (not used - ignored)  
TX_ER  
TX_ER  
28  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
6.7.2 RGMII Mode  
The RGMII interface has three modes of operation to support three Ethernet speeds: 10, 100 and 1000Mbps. This  
document refers to these three modes as RGMII-1000 for 1000Mbps operation, RGMII-100 for 100Mbps operation  
and RGMII-10 for 10Mbps operation. RGMII is specified to support speed changes among the three rates as  
needed. The RGMII specification document can be downloaded from http://www.hp.com/rnd/pdfs/RGMIIv1_3.pdf  
or can be found by a web search for "RGMII 1.3".  
On the receive RGMII interface the MAX24288 does not report in-band status for link state, clock speed and duplex  
during normal inter-frame. This status indication is defined as optional in the RGMII specification.  
The parallel interface can be configured for RGMII modes using software configuration or pin configuration at reset.  
For pin configuration (see section 6.1) one of the following combinations of pin states must be present during  
device reset:  
COL=0, RXD[1:0]=xx, CRS=1 (xx: 00=RGMII-10, 01=RGMII-100, 10=RGMII-1000)  
COL=1, CRS=1 (RGMII-1000 only)  
For software configuration, the following register fields must be set: GMIICR.SPD[1:0]=xx and GMIICR.DDR=1  
(where xx values are the same as shown above for RXD[1:0]).  
Table 6-9. RGMII Parallel Bus Pin Naming  
Pin Name  
RXCLK  
RXD[3:0]  
RX_DV  
RX_ER  
CRS  
RGMII Pin Name  
RXC  
RD[3:0]  
Function  
Receive 125MHz clock output  
Receive data bits 3 to 0 and 7 to 4 output  
Receive data valid output  
Not used  
Outputs carrier sense signal  
Outputs collision signal  
RX_CTL  
---  
---  
---  
---  
COL  
TXCLK  
Outputs 125MHz from the TX PLL for use by the MAC when  
GMIICR.TXCLK_EN=1.  
GTXCLK  
TXD[3:0]  
TX_EN  
TXC  
Transmit 125MHz clock input  
Transmit data bits 3 to 0 and 7 to 4 input  
Transmit data enable input  
Not used  
TD[3:0]  
TX_CTL  
---  
TX_ER  
6.7.2.1 RGMII-1000 Mode  
RGMII-1000 is a reduced pin count alternative to the GMII interface. Pin count is reduced by sampling and  
updating data and control signals on both clock edges. For data, only four data lines are used, as shown in Table  
6-9. Data bits 3:0 are latched on the rising edge of the clock, and data bits 7:4 are latched on the falling edge. The  
transmit control signals TX_EN and TX_ER are multiplexed onto a single TX_CTL signal. TX_EN is latched on the  
rising edge of the transmit clock TXC while a modified TX_ER signal is latched on the falling edge of TXC. The  
receive control signals RX_DV and RX_ER are multiplexed onto a single RX_CTL signal. RX_DV is latched on the  
rising edge of the receive clock RXC while a modified RX_ER signal is latched on the falling edge of RXC.  
The modified TX_ER signal = (GMII TX_ER) XOR (GMII TX_EN). The modified RX_ER signal = (GMII_RX_ER)  
XOR (GMII_RX_DV). These modifications are done to reduce power by eliminating control signal toggling at  
125MHz during normal data transmission and during idle.  
On the transmit side of the parallel interface the MAX24288 ignores TX_ER, as it does in all 1000Mbps interface  
modes, since it only operates full-duplex at 1000Mbps. Therefore the 0,1 TX_CTL encoding is interpreted as 0,0  
(idle, normal interframe). Similarly, the 1,0 TX_CTL encoding is interpreted as 1,1 (normal data transmission).  
See the RGMII v1.3 specification document for functional timing diagrams. DC electrical characteristics are listed in  
section 9.2.1. AC electrical characteristics are listed in section 9.3.4 and 9.3.5.  
29  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
6.7.2.2 RGMII-10 and RGMII-100 Modes  
The RGMII interface can be used to convey 10 and 100Mbps Ethernet data. The theory of operation at these lower  
speeds is similar to RGMII-1000 mode as described above but with a 2.5MHz clock for 10Mbps operation, a  
25MHz clock for 100Mbps operation, and data latched and updated only on the rising edge of the clock. The  
RXD[3:0] pins maintain their values during the negative edge of RXCLK. The control signals are conveyed on both  
clock edges exactly as described for RGMII-1000. See the RGMII v1.3 specification document for functional timing  
diagrams. DC electrical characteristics are listed in section 9.2.1. AC characteristics are listed in section 9.3.4 and  
9.3.5.  
6.7.2.3 Clocks  
The RXCLK clock output is 125, 25 or 2.5MHz, depending on RGMII mode. It is derived from the recovered clock  
from the receive serial data.  
The GTXCLK clock input must be 125, 25 or 2.5MHz ±100 ppm. The GTXCLK clock is not used as the source of  
the serial data transmit clock.  
6.7.3 MII Mode  
The MAX24288's MII interface is compliant to IEEE 802.3 clause 22 except that TX_ER is ignored (and therefore  
the MAX24288 doesn't receive transmit error propagation from the MAC).  
The parallel interface can be configured for MII mode using software configuration or pin configuration at reset. For  
pin configuration (see section 6.1) device pins must be set as follows during device reset: COL=0, RXD[1:0]=0x,  
CRS=0 (x=0 for 10Mbps, x=1 for 100Mbps). For software configuration, the following register fields must be set:  
GMIICR.SPD[1:0]=0x and GMIICR.DDR=0.  
Since the MAX24288 can be used in a variety of applications, it can be configured to source the TXCLK and  
RXCLK as a PHY normally does or to accept TXCLK and RXCLK from a neighboring component. The former case  
is called DCE mode; the latter is called DTE mode. DTE/DCE selection is controlled by the GMIICR.DTE_DCE  
register bit.  
In DTE mode the MAX24288 is configured for operation on the MAC side of the MII. Both TXCLK and RXCLK are  
inputs at 2.5MHz (10Mbps MII) or 25MHz (100Mbps MII) ±100 ppm. TXCLK is not used as the serial data transmit  
clock (which is derived from the REFCLK input instead).  
In DCE mode the MAX24288 is configured for operation on the PHY side of the MII. Both TXCLK and RXCLK are  
outputs at 2.5MHz or 25MHz. The TXCLK output clock is derived from the REFCLK input. The RXCLK output clock  
is derived from the recovered clock from the receive serial data when a receive signal is present or from REFCLK  
when no receive signal is present.  
See 802.3 clause 22 for functional timing diagrams. MII DC electrical characteristics are listed in section 9.2.1. AC  
electrical characteristics are listed in section 9.3.4 and 9.3.5.  
On the transmit MII interface the MAX24288 requires that the preamble including the SFD must be an even number  
of nibbles (i.e. number of nibbles divided by 2 is an integer). On the receive MII interface the MAX24288 always  
outputs an even number of nibbles of preamble.  
30  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Table 6-10. MII Parallel Bus Pin Naming  
Pin Name  
RXCLK  
RXD[3:0]  
RX_DV  
RX_ER  
CRS  
802.3 Pin Name  
RX_CLK  
RXD[3L0]  
RX_DV  
RX_ER  
CRS  
Function  
Receive 2.5 or 25MHz clock, can be input or output  
Receive data nibble output  
Receive data valid output  
Receive data error output  
Receive carrier sense  
COL  
COL  
Receive collision  
TXCLK  
GTXCLK  
TXD[3:0]  
TX_EN  
TX_ER  
TX_CLK  
---  
TXD[3:0]  
TX_EN  
TX_ER  
Transmit 2.5 or 25MHz clock, can be input or output  
Not used  
Transmit data nibble input  
Transmit data enable input  
Transmit data error input (not used - ignored)  
6.8  
Auto-Negotiation (AN)  
In the MAX24288 the auto-negotiation mechanism described in IEEE 802.3 Clause 37 is used for auto-negotiation  
between IEEE 802.3 1000BASE-X link partners as well as the transfer of SGMII PHY status to a neighboring MAC  
as described in the Cisco Serial-SGMII document ENG-46158. The 802.3 1000BASE-X next page functionality is  
not supported. The PCSCR.BASEX register bit controls the link timer time-out mode of the auto-negotiation  
protocol.  
The auto-negotiation mechanism between link partners uses a special code set that passes a 16-bit value called  
tx_Config_Reg[15:0] as defined in IEEE 802.3. The auto-negotiation transfer starts when BMCR.AN_START is set  
(self clearing) and BMCR.AN_EN is set. The tx_Config_Reg value is continuously sent with the ACK bit (bit 14)  
clear and the other bits sourced from the AN_ADV register. When the device receives a non-zero rx_Config_Reg  
value it sets the ACK bit in the tx_Config_Reg, saves the rx_Config_Reg bits to the AN_RX register, and sets the  
AN_EXP.PAGE and IR.PAGE bits to tell system software that a new page has arrived. The tx_Config_Reg  
transmission stops when the link timer times out after 10ms in 1000BASE-X mode or after 1.6ms in SGMII mode.  
System software must complete the auto-negotiation function by processing the AN_RX register and configuring  
the hardware appropriately.  
The fields of the auto-negotiation registers AN_ADV and AN_RX have different meanings when used in  
1000BASE-X or SGMII mode. See section 6.8.1 for 1000BASE-X and section 6.8.2. for SGMII.  
By default, an internal watchdog timer monitors the auto-negotiation process. If the link is not up within 5 seconds  
after auto-negotiation was started, the watchdog timer restarts the auto-negotiation. This watchdog timer can be  
disabled by setting PCSCR.WD_DIS=1.  
6.8.1 1000BASE-X Auto-Negotiation  
In 1000BASE-X auto-negotiation, two link partners send their specific capabilities to each other. Each link partner  
compares the capabilities that it advertises in its AN_ADV register against its link partner's advertised abilities,  
which are stored in the AN_RX register when received. Each link partner uses the same arbitration algorithm  
specified in IEEE 802.3 clause 37.2 to determine how it should configure its hardware, and, therefore, the two link  
partners' configurations should match. However, if there is no overlap of capabilities between the link partners, the  
RF bits (Remote Fault, see Table 6-11) are set to 11, and the auto-negotiation process is started again. An external  
processor configures the advertised abilities, reads the link partners abilities, performs the arbitration algorithm,  
and sets the RF bits as needed.  
The MAX24288 AN block implements the auto-negotiation state machine shown in IEEE 802.3 Figure 37-6. It also  
generates an internal link-down status signal whenever the AN state machine is in any state other than  
AN_DISABLE_LINK_OK or LINK_OK. This link-down signal is used to clear the active-low BMSR.LINK_ST bit and  
is used to squelch output clock signals on GPIO pins when CR.RCSQL=1.  
31  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
System software can configure the MAX24288 for 1000BASE-X auto-negotiation by setting PCSCR.BASEX=1 and  
BMCR.AN_EN=1.  
The MAX24288 can also be configured for 1000BASE-X auto-negotiation by pin settings at reset without software  
configuration. In 15-pin configuration mode (COL=0 at reset), if RXD[1:0]=10 and GPO2=1 and RX_DV=1 at reset  
then PCSCR.BASEX is set to 1 to indicate 1000BASE-X mode and BMCR.AN_EN is set to 1 to enable auto-  
negotiation. In 3-pin configuration (COL=1 at reset), if GPO2=1 then PCSCR.BASEX is set to 1 to indicate  
1000BASE-X mode and auto-negotiation is automatically enabled. In both pin configuration modes the AN_ADV  
register's reset-default value causes device capabilities to be advertised as follows: full-duplex only, no pause  
support, no remote fault. See section 6.1 for details about pin configuration at reset.  
Figure 6-8. Auto-Negotiation with a Link Partner over 1000BASE-X  
GMII  
1000BASE-SX/LX  
RXD[7:0]  
CDR  
RD  
TD  
TD  
RD  
RX_CLK  
125MHz  
Optical  
Module  
Optical  
Module  
Link  
Partner  
CDR  
MAX  
24288  
TXD[7:0]  
GTX_CLK  
125MHz  
BASEX=1  
AN Advertisement  
AN Acknowledgement  
AN Advertisement  
AN Acknowledgement  
The tx_Config_Reg and rx_Config_Reg format for 1000BASE-X auto-negotiation is shown in Figure 6-9. All  
reserved bits are set to 0. The ACK bit is set and detected by the PCS auto-negotiation hardware.  
Figure 6-9. 1000BASE-X Auto-Negotiation tx_Config_Reg and rx_Config_Reg Fields  
lsb  
msb  
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15  
rsvd rsvd rsvd rsvd rsvd FD HD PS1 PS2 rsvd rsvd rsvd RF1 RF2 Ack NP  
The AN_ADV register is the source of tx_Config_Reg. The received rx_Config_Reg is written to the AN_RX  
register. The auto-negotiation fields for AN_ADV and AN_RX are described in Table 6-11 and Table 6-12.  
Table 6-11. AN_ADV 1000BASE-X Auto-Negotiation Ability Advertisement Register (MDIO 4)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
NP  
Next Page capability is not supported. This bit should always  
RW  
0
be set to 0.  
14  
Reserved  
Ignore on Read  
RO  
RW  
0
00  
13:12 RF  
Remote Fault. Used to indicate to the link partner that a  
remote fault condition has been detected:  
00 = No Error, Link OK  
01 = Link Failure  
10 = Off Line  
11 = Auto-Negotiation Error  
11:9  
ZERO1  
Always write 000  
RW  
0
32  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
8:7  
PS  
Pause. Used to indicate pause capabilities to the link  
partner.  
RW  
00  
00 = No Pause  
01 = Symmetric Pause  
10 = Asymmetric Pause  
11 = Both Symmetric and Asymmetric Pause  
Used to indicate ability to support half duplex to link partner.  
Since half duplex is not supported always write 0.  
Used to indicate ability to support full duplex to link partner.  
0 = Do not advertise full duplex capability  
1 = Advertise full duplex capability  
Always write 00000  
6
5
HD  
FD  
RW  
RW  
0
1
4:0  
ZERO2  
RW  
00000  
Table 6-12. AN_RX 1000BASE-X Auto-negotiation Ability Receive Register (MDIO 5)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
NP  
Next Page. Used by link partner to indicate its PCS has a  
Next Page to exchange.  
RO  
0
0 = No Next Page exchange request  
1 = Next Page exchange request  
Indicates link partner successfully received the previously  
transmitted base page.  
Remote Fault. Link partner uses this field to indicate a  
remote fault condition has been detected.  
00 = No Error, Link OK  
14  
Acknowledge  
RO  
RO  
0
0
13:12 RF  
01 = Link Failure  
10 = Off Line  
11 = Auto-Negotiation Error  
11:9  
8:7  
Reserved  
PS  
Ignore on Read  
Pause. Used by link partner to indicate its pause capabilities.  
00 = No Pause  
RO  
RO  
0
0
01 = Symmetric Pause  
10 = Asymmetric Pause  
11 = Both Symmetric and Asymmetric Pause  
Used by link partner to indicate ability to support half duplex.  
0 = Not able to support half duplex  
1 = Able to support half duplex  
Used by link partner to indicate ability to support full duplex.  
0 = Not able to support full duplex  
1 = Able to support full duplex  
6
HD  
RO  
RO  
RO  
0
0
0
5
FD  
4:0  
Reserved  
Ignore on Read  
6.8.2 SGMII Control Information Transfer  
SGMII control information transfer mode is enabled by setting PCSCR.BASEX=0. According the SGMII  
specification, a PHY sends control information to the neighboring MAC using the same facilities used for  
1000BASE-X auto-negotiation (AN_ADV, AN_RX, tx_Config_Reg, rx_Config_Reg, see section 6.8.1). Since the  
MAX24288 sits between a PHY and a MAC it can behave as the transmitter or receiver in the control information  
transfer process depending on how it is connected to neighboring components.  
When the MAX24288 is connected to a 1000BASE-T PHY, for example, the PHY transfers control information to  
the MAX24288, which then acknowledges the information transfer. System software then reads the control  
information from the MAX24288 and configures the MAX24288 to match the PHY. This situation is shown in case  
(a) of Figure 6-10.  
33  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
In other scenarios, such as when the MAX24288 is connected by SGMII to a switch IC, shown in case (b) of Figure  
6-10, the MAX24288 transfers control information to the neighboring component, which then acknowledges the  
information transfer. System software then reads the control information from the neighboring component and  
configures that component to match the MAX24288.  
The MAX24288 AN block implements the auto-negotiation state machine shown in IEEE 802.3 Figure 37-6. It also  
generates an internal link-down status signal whenever the AN state machine is in any state other than  
AN_DISABLE_LINK_OK or LINK_OK. This link-down signal is used to clear the active-low BMSR.LINK_ST bit and  
is used to squelch output clock signals on GPIO pins when CR.RCSQL=1.  
Figure 6-10. SGMII Control Information Generation, Reception and Acknowledgement  
Speed Control - (a) PHY Initiated  
<SGMII>  
ETH  
RXD[7:0]  
Peripherial  
RX_CLK  
125 MHz  
CDR  
MAX24288  
RD  
CAT5  
Media  
PHY  
MAC  
TXD[7:0]  
TD  
TX_CLK  
125 MHz  
TCLK  
625 MHz  
<GMII/MII>  
MDIO  
Initiate Speed Control  
Acknowledge Speed Control  
Speed Control - (b) Device Initiated  
(to allow Switch to connect to slower peripheral MAC devices)  
<SGMII>  
ETH  
RXD[7:0]  
Peripherial  
RX_CLK  
125 MHz  
CDR  
MAX24288  
RD  
M
A
C
MAC  
Switch  
TXD[7:0]  
TD  
SDH/PDH  
Mapper  
TX_CLK  
125 MHz  
TCLK  
625 MHz  
<MII>  
MDIO  
Initiate Speed Control  
Acknowledge Speed Control  
The control information fields carried on the SGMII are: link status (up/down), link speed (1000/100/10Mbps) and  
duplex mode (full/half). The tx_Config_Reg and rx_Config_Reg format for SGMII control information transfer is  
shown in Figure 6-11. All reserved bits are set to 0. The ACK bit is set and detected by the PCS hardware.  
Figure 6-11. SGMII tx_Config_Reg and rx_Config_Reg Fields  
lsb  
msb  
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15  
1
rsvd rsvd rsvd rsvd rsvd rsvd rsvd rsvd rsvd Spd Spd dplx rsvd Ack LK  
When the MAX24288 is the control information receiver, its AN_ADV register must be set to 0x0001. The received  
control information is automatically stored in the AN_RX register.  
When the MAX24288 is the control information transmitter, the information is sourced from its AN_ADV register.  
The MAX24288 can be configured to automatically send SGMII control information by pin settings at reset without  
software configuration. In 15-pin configuration mode (COL=0 at reset), if RXD[1:0]=10 and GPO2=0 and RX_DV=1  
34  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
at reset then PCSCR:BASEX is set to 0 to indicate SGMII mode, BMCR.AN_EN is set to 1 to enable auto-  
negotiation, and the AN_ADV SPD[1:0] bits are set by the reset values of the RXD[1:0] pins. In 3-pin configuration  
(COL=1 at reset), if GPO2=0 then PCSCR.BASEX is set to 0 to indicate SGMII mode, auto-negotiation is  
automatically enabled, and the AN_ADV SPD[1:0] bits are set to 10 (1000Mbps). In both pin configuration modes  
the AN_ADV register's reset-default value causes device capabilities to be advertised as follows: full-duplex only,  
link up. See section 6.1 for details about pin configuration at reset.  
The AN_ADV register is the source of tx_Config_Reg value. The received rx_Config_Reg value is written to the  
AN_RX register. These meanings are described in Table 6-13 and Table 6-14.  
Table 6-13. AN_ADV SGMII Configuration Information Register (MDIO 4)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
LK  
Link Status.  
RW  
Note 1  
0 = Link down  
1 = Link up  
14  
13  
12  
Reserved  
ZERO1  
DPLX  
Ignore on Read  
Always write 0  
Duplex mode  
RO  
RW  
RW  
0
0
1
0 = Half duplex  
1 = Full duplex  
Link speed  
11:10 SPD[1:0]  
RW  
Note 1  
00 = 10Mbps  
01 = 100Mbps  
10 = 1000Mbps  
11 = Reserved  
Always write 000000000  
Always write 1  
9:1  
0
ZERO2  
ONE  
RW  
RW  
0
1
Note 1:See the AN_ADV register description.  
Table 6-14. AN_RX SGMII Configuration Information Receive Register (MDIO 5)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
LK  
Link partner link status.  
0 = Link down  
RO  
0
1 = Link up  
14:13 Reserved  
12 DPLX  
Ignore on read  
Link partner duplex mode  
0 = Half duplex  
RO  
RO  
0
0
1 = Full duplex  
11:10 SPD  
Link partner link speed  
00 = 10Mbps  
01 = 100Mbps  
10 = 1000Mbps  
11 = Reserved  
Ignore on read  
RO  
RO  
0
0
9:0  
Reserved  
35  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
6.9  
Data Paths  
The MAX24288 data paths performs bidirectional conversion between a parallel interface (GMII, RGMII or MII) and  
a 1.25Gbps serial interface (1000BASE-X or SGMII).  
In GMII, RGMII and MII modes, the data paths implement the 802.3 PCS and PMA sublayers including auto-  
negotiation. The parallel interface data is 8 bits wide. The PCS logic performs 8B/10B encoding and decoding. The  
PMA logic performs 10:1 serialization and deserialization.  
6.9.1 Serial to Parallel Conversion and Decoding  
Refer to the block diagram in Figure 2-1. Clock and data are recovered from the incoming 1.25Gbps serial signal  
on RDP/RDN. The serial data is then converted to 10-bit parallel data with 10-bit alignment determined by  
detecting commas. The 10-bit code groups are then 8B/10B decoded by the PCS decoder as specified in 802.3  
clause 36. The 8-bit data stream then passes through a rate adaption buffer that accounts for phase and/or  
frequency differences between recovered clock and MII clock. Next the data passes through the 1588 packet  
classifier and modifier logic where 1588 packets are identified, timestamped and optionally modified on-the-fly.  
Finally, the 8-bit data is clocked out of the device to a neighboring MAC either 4 bits or 8 bits at a time. Half duplex  
is supported in 10 and 100 Mbps modes but not in 1000 Mbps modes. Carrier extend is not supported in 1000  
Mbps modes.  
6.9.2 Parallel to Serial Conversion and Encoding  
Refer to the block diagram in Figure 2-1. Parallel data is received from the MAC clocked by a 125MHz, 25MHz or  
2.5MHz clock, either 4 bits or 8 bits at a time. The data then passes through a rate adaption buffer that accounts for  
phase and/or frequency differences between MII clock and transmit clock. The 8-bit data stream then passes  
through the 1588 packet classifier and modifier logic where 1588 packets are identified, timestamped and  
optionally modified on-the-fly. The data is then 8B/10B encoded by the PCS encoder as specified in 802.3 clause  
36. The 10-bit code-groups are then serialized. The resulting 1.25Gbps serial data is transmitted to a neighboring  
1000BASE-X optical module or SGMII-interface copper PHY. Half duplex is supported in 10 and 100 Mbps modes  
but not in 1000 Mbps modes. Carrier extend is not supported in 1000 Mbps modes.  
6.9.3 Rate Adaption Buffers, Jumbo Packets and Clock Frequency Differences  
The MAX24288 can handle jumbo packets up to 9001 bytes long as long as the clock frequencies of each rate  
adaption buffer’s write clock and the read clock are both within ±100ppm of nominal.  
For example, in GMII mode the transmit rate adaption buffer is written by GTXCLK and read by a 125MHz clock  
frequency locked to the REFCLK signal. If GTXCLK and REFCLK are both maintained within ±100ppm of nominal  
frequency then jumbo packets up to 9001 bytes long can be accommodated by the transmit rate adaption buffer.  
36  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
6.10 Timing Paths  
Figure 6-12. Timing Path Diagram  
RX 1588  
Packet  
Classifier  
and  
RX  
Rate  
Adaption  
Buffer  
(RX BUFF)  
RX  
PCS  
Decoder  
625M  
RX PLL  
(CDR)  
RDP/RDN  
RXCLK  
Deserializer  
125, 62.5a,  
25, 2.5 MHz  
Modifier  
125, 62.5a, 62.5b, 25, 2.5 MHz  
125, 62.5a, 62.5b, 25, 2.5 MHz  
62.5b  
(2 clk TBI)  
GTXCLK  
125, 25, 2.5 MHz  
125, 62.5a, 62.5b, 25, 2.5 MHz  
TX 1588  
TX  
Rate  
Adaption  
Buffer  
(TX BUFF)  
625M  
Serializer  
TCLKP/N  
Packet  
Classifier  
and  
TX  
PCS  
Encoder  
TXCLK  
125, 62.5b, 25, 2.5 MHz  
Modifier  
125M  
(8ph)  
1588 Time Engine, Timestampers and  
Programmable Event Generators  
TX  
PLL  
REFCLK  
125, 25, 12.8, 10M  
Numbers in the tables below are clock frequencies in MHz.  
Table 6-15. Timing Path Muxes No Loopback  
TX Rate  
Buffer Mux  
GTXCLK 125  
GTXCLK 125  
GTXCLK 25  
GTXCLK 2.5  
TX PLL 25  
TXCLK 25  
TX PLL 2.5  
TXCLK 2.5  
TXCLK  
Mux/Driver  
RX PCS  
Mux  
RX Rate  
Buffer Mux  
RX PLL 125  
RX PLL 125  
RX PLL 25  
RX PLL 2.5  
RX PLL 25  
RXCLK 25  
RX PLL 2.5  
RXCLK 2.5  
RXCLK  
Driver  
Mode  
GMII  
--  
--  
--  
RX PLL 62.5  
RX PLL 62.5  
RX PLL 62.5  
RX PLL 62.5  
RX PLL 62.5  
RX PLL 62.5  
RX PLL 62.5  
RX PLL 62.5  
RX PLL 125  
RX PLL 125  
RX PLL 25  
RX PLL 2.5  
RX PLL 25  
---  
RGMII 1000  
RGMII 100  
RGMII 10  
MII 100 - DCE  
MII 100 - DTE  
MII 10 - DCE  
MII 10 - DTE  
--  
TX PLL 25  
---  
TX PLL 2.5  
--  
RX PLL 2.5  
---  
Table 6-16. Timing Path Muxes DLB Loopback  
TX Rate  
Buffer Mux  
GTXCLK 125  
GTXCLK 125  
GTXCLK 25  
GTXCLK 2.5  
TX PLL 25  
TXCLK 25  
TX PLL 2.5  
TXCLK 2.5  
TXCLK  
Mux/Driver  
RX PCS  
Mux  
RX Rate  
Buffer Mux  
TX PLL 125  
TX PLL 125  
TX PLL 25  
TX PLL 2.5  
TX PLL 25  
TXCLK 25  
TX PLL 2.5  
TXCLK 2.5  
RXCLK  
Driver  
Mode  
GMII  
--  
--  
--  
TX PLL 62.5  
TX PLL 62.5  
TX PLL 62.5  
TX PLL 62.5  
TX PLL 62.5  
TX PLL 62.5  
TX PLL 62.5  
TX PLL 62.5  
TX PLL 125  
TX PLL 125  
TX PLL 25  
TX PLL 2.5  
TX PLL 25  
---  
RGMII 1000  
RGMII 100  
RGMII 10  
MII 100 - DCE  
MII 100 - DTE  
MII 10 - DCE  
MII 10 - DTE  
--  
TX PLL 25  
---  
TX PLL 2.5  
---  
TX PLL 2.5  
---  
37  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Table 6-17. Timing Path Muxes RLB Loopback  
TX Rate  
Buffer Mux  
RX PLL 125  
RX PLL 125  
RX PLL 25  
RX PLL 2.5  
RX PLL 25  
RXCLK 25  
RX PLL 2.5  
RXCLK 2.5  
TXCLK  
Mux/Driver  
RX PCS  
Mux  
RX Rate  
Buffer Mux  
RX PLL 125  
RX PLL 125  
RX PLL 25  
RX PLL 2.5  
RX PLL 25  
RXCLK 25  
RX PLL 2.5  
RXCLK 2.5  
RXCLK  
Driver  
Mode  
GMII  
--  
--  
--  
RX PLL 62.5  
RX PLL 62.5  
RX PLL 62.5  
RX PLL 62.5  
RX PLL 62.5  
RX PLL 62.5  
RX PLL 62.5  
RX PLL 62.5  
RX PLL 125  
RX PLL 125  
RX PLL 25  
RX PLL 2.5  
RX PLL 25  
---  
RGMII 1000  
RGMII 100  
RGMII 10  
MII 100 - DCE  
MII 100 - DTE  
MII 10 - DCE  
MII 10 - DTE  
--  
TX PLL 25  
---  
TX PLL 2.5  
--  
RX PLL 2.5  
--  
6.10.1 RX PLL  
The RX PLL is used to recover the clock from the RDP/RDN high-speed serial input signal. It generates 625MHz  
for the de-serializer and 125MHz, 62.5MHz, 25MHz and 2.5MHz for the receive-side PCS decoder, 1588 packet  
classifier and modifier, rate adaption buffer and parallel port logic. It also generates a loss of lock (RLOL) signal for  
the IR.RLOL latched status bit.  
6.10.2 TX PLL  
The TX PLL generates a low-jitter 625MHz clock signal for the serializer and the TCLKP/TCLKN differential output.  
This clock signal meets the jitter requirements of IEEE802.3. It also generates 125MHz, 62.5MHz, 25MHz and  
2.5MHz for the transmit-side PCS decoder, 1588 packet classifier and modifier, rate adaption buffer and parallel  
port logic. In addition it generates an eight-phase 125MHz clock for the IEEE1588 output clock generator,  
programmable event generators and timestampers.  
The TX PLL locks to the REFCLK signal, which can be 125MHz, 25MHz, 12.8MHz or 10MHz as specified by the  
RXD[3:2] pins during device reset. The 12.8MHz and 10MHz frequencies enable the device to share an oscillator  
with any clock synchronization ICs that may be on the same board.  
6.10.3 Input Jitter Tolerance  
The input jitter tolerance is specified at the receive serial input RDP/RDN. The MAX24288 CDR block accepts data  
with maximum total jitter up to 0.75 UI (or 600 ps) peak-to-peak as required by 802.3 Table 38-10 and as shown in  
Table 9-8. Total jitter is composed of both deterministic and random components. The allowed random jitter equals  
the allowed total jitter minus the actual deterministic jitter at RDP/RDN.  
6.10.4 Output Jitter Generation  
The output jitter generation limit is specified at the transmit serial output (TDP/TDN) of the serializer. According to  
Table 38-10 of IEEE 802.3, the maximum total jitter generated must be less than 0.24 UI (192 ps) peak-to-peak  
and the deterministic jitter should be less than 0.10 UI (80 ps) peak-to-peak. MAX24288 typical and maximum jitter  
generation specifications are shown in Table 9-10. Actual output jitter performance is a function of REFCLK signal  
jitter. Contact the factory for a tool to calculate output jitter from REFCLK phase noise.  
6.10.5 TX PLL Jitter Transfer  
The TX PLL has a bandwidth of approximately 200kHz and jitter transfer peaking of 0.1dB or less.  
6.10.6 GPIO Pins as Clock Outputs  
Reference Clock. A 125MHz clock from the TX PLL (locked to the REFCLK signal) can be output on one or more  
GPIO pins. See section 6.2 for configuration details. One use for this 125MHz output is to provide a 125MHz  
transmit clock to a MAC block on a neighboring component. The MAC then uses this signal to clock its transmit  
GMII/RGMII/MII pins.  
38  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Recovered Clock. A 25MHz or 125MHz clock signal from the receive clock and data recovery PLL can be output  
on one or more GPIO pins. This clock signal is typically used in synchronous Ethernet applications to send  
recovered Ethernet line timing to the system's central timing function. See section 6.2 for configuration details.  
These output clock signals do not glitch during internal switching between frequencies or sources or when being  
squelched and unsquelched.  
6.11 Loopbacks  
Three loopbacks are available in the MAX24288. The loopback data paths are shown in the block diagram in  
Figure 2-1. The clocking paths are shown in section 6.10.  
6.11.1 Diagnostic Loopback  
Diagnostic loopback is enabled by setting BMCR.DLB=1. During diagnostic loopback the PCS decoder in the  
receive path takes 10-bit codes from the PCS encoder in the transmit path rather than from the deserializer. In  
these modes the rate adaption buffers are in the path, and therefore the receive clock can be different than the  
transmit clock.  
During diagnostic loopback, if CR.DLBDO=0 the TDP/TDN output driver is placed in a high-impedance state and  
the TDP/TDN pins are both pulled up to 3.3V by their internal 50termination resistors. The TCLKP/TCLKN output  
continues to toggle if enabled. If CR.DLBDO=1 then data is transmitted on TDP/TDN during diagnostic loopback  
while also being looped back to the receiver.  
During diagnostic loopback, the COL signal remains deasserted at all times, unless BMCR.COL_TEST is set, in  
which case the COL signal behaves as described in 802.3 section 22.2.4.1.9.  
6.11.2 Terminal Loopback  
Terminal loopback is enabled by setting PCSCR.TLB=1. When this loopback is enabled, the receive CDR takes  
serial data from the transmit driver rather than from the RDP/RDN pins.  
During terminal loopback, if CR.TLBDO=0 the TDP/TDN output driver is placed in a high-impedance state and the  
TDP/TDN pins are both pulled up to 3.3V by their internal 50termination resistors. The TCLKP/TCLKN output  
continues to toggle if enabled. If CR.TLBDO=1 then data is transmitted on TDP/TDN during terminal loopback  
while also being looped back to the receiver..  
6.11.3 Remote Loopback  
Remote loopback is enable by setting GMIICR.RLB=1. When this loopback is enabled, the transmit parallel  
interface logic takes data from the receive parallel interface logic rather than from the transmit parallel interface  
pins. During remote loopback the rate adaption buffers, PCS encoder and decoder, and PCS auto-negotiation  
function all operate normally.  
Loopback control bits BMCR.DLB and PCSCR.TLB must be set to zero for correct remote loopback operation.  
During remote loopback, if CR.RLBDO=0 the receive parallel interface pins RXD, RX_DV, RX_ER, CRS and COL  
are all driven low. If CR.RLBDO=1 then receive data and control information are output on these pins while also  
being looped back to the transmitter.  
39  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
6.12 Diagnostic and Test Functions  
Transmit PCS Pattern Generator. The PCS encoder has a built-in pattern generator block. These patterns  
provide different types of jitter in order to test the performance of a downstream PHY receiver. When  
JIT_DIAG.JIT_EN=1, the PCS encoder outputs 10-bit codes from the jitter pattern generator rather than from the  
8B/10B encoding logic. The pattern to be generated is specified by JIT_DIAG.JIT_PAT. Patterns include low-,  
mixed- and high-frequency test patterns from 802.3 Annex 36A as well as a custom 10-bit pattern from the  
JIT_DIAG.CUST_PAT register field.  
When JIT_EN is set to 1, pattern generation starts and packet transmission stops immediately. This can cut off the  
tail end of the packet currently being transmitted and can also cause a running disparity error. When JIT_EN is set  
to 0, pattern generation stops and packet transmission starts immediately. This can result in the transmission of  
only the tail end of a packet and can also cause a running disparity error.  
40  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
6.13 1588 Hardware  
6.13.1 1588 Time Engine  
The MAX24288 has a built-in real-time clock that can be controlled so that it is (1) syntonized or synchronized to a  
remote master using the IEEE1588 protocol over a packet network, (2) syntonized or synchronized to a master  
within the system using clock and/or time alignment signals, or (3) syntonized to a remote master using adaptive  
mode circuit emulation over a packet network.  
A block diagram of the time engine is shown in Figure 6-13. As the figure shows, the time engine is an accumulator  
clocked by a reference clock derived from the REFCLK signal. By default the reference clock is 125MHz from the  
TX PLL, which is frequency locked to the signal on the REFCLK pin (see Figure 6-12).  
The accumulator is a real-time clock with a 48-bit seconds field, a 30-bit nanoseconds field and an 8-bit fractional  
nanoseconds field. Negative time is not supported. During each reference clock cycle, a number (TIME_ADJ) is  
added to the accumulator to advance the time. Figure 6-14 shows the logic that generates the TIME_ADJ signal. In  
free-run operation, when the reference clock frequency is 125MHz, exactly 8.0ns (the period of a 125MHz clock)  
should be added to the accumulator to advance time by 8ns every 8ns reference clock period.  
The TIME_ADJ value has a resolution of 2-32ns while the accumulator has a resolution of 2-8ns. The additional  
resolution of the TIME_ADJ field is maintained by the delta-sigma () block. When given a TIME_ADJ value that  
is not an integer multiple of 2-8ns (i.e. a TIME_ADJ value such that N TIME_ADJ N+1 where N is an integer  
multiple of 2-8ns), the delta-sigma block continually dithers between an output of N and an output of N+1 in a  
pattern and ratio that makes the average output value be exactly equal to the full-resolution TIME_ADJ value. This  
technique allows very high resolution such as a TIME_ADJ resolution of 2^-32ns in this design. The dithering done  
by the delta-sigma block does cause phase jitter on output signals generated by the time engine's programmable  
event generators (see section 6.13.3), but this phase jitter is very high frequency and can be easily filtered by  
downstream PLLs.  
In some applications the time engine must be frequency-locked to a timing master without the conveyance of  
frequency over layer 1 (Synchronous Ethernet or SDH/SONET). In this situation, system software and the  
MAX24288’s time engine are used to form a control loop similar to a PLL. In this PLL, software implements the  
phase detector and loop filter while the time engine is the controllable oscillator.  
As shown in Figure 6-13 and Figure 6-14, the time engine has three controls that can be used by system software  
to time- and frequency-lock to a time master:  
1. Directly write the time accumulator through the TIME register  
2. Frequency adjustment: change the frequency by changing the value in the PERIOD register  
3. Time adjustment: temporarily add an offset (PER_ADJ) to the period for a specific number of reference  
clock cycles (ADJ_CNT)  
These controls allow the time engine to be synchronized quickly to its master by first writing the time directly, then  
doing an initial pull-in step using the time adjustment function, then completing the pull-in process and maintaining  
lock with frequency (period) adjustments. The time adjustment function is also used to quickly resynchronize time  
after a time interval spent in holdover without causing slave components to lose synchronization.  
41  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Figure 6-13. 1588 Time Engine  
ns  
8 bits  
ns fraction  
32 bits  
TIME register  
TIME register  
Load  
Load  
TIME_ADJ  
Accumulator  
nanoseconds  
0
1
Accumulator  
Seconds  
unsigned integer 40 bits  
30 integer bits  
8 fraction bits  
48 bits  
2-8ns resolution  
Increment  
-MAX  
0  
125MHz Reference Clock  
NSEC  
38 bits  
SEC  
48 bits  
seconds  
48 bits  
nanoseconds  
30 bits  
ns fraction  
8 bits  
Time Format  
Figure 6-14. Time Engine Period Generator  
Load  
ADJ_LD  
¹0  
Down  
Counter  
ADJ_CNT  
uint 24 bits  
0
0
1
ns  
8 bits  
ns fraction  
32 bits  
PER_ADJ  
int 40 bits  
ns  
8 bits  
ns fraction  
32 bits  
PERIOD  
uint 40 bits  
0
1
TIME_ADJ  
unsigned integer 40 bits  
ns  
8 bits  
ns fraction  
32 bits  
EXT_CLK_ENA  
ns  
8 bits  
EXT_PER  
uint 8 bits  
External Clock  
Tracking Logic  
EXT_CLK  
EXT_DIV  
EXT_LIM  
uint 2 bits  
6.13.1.1  
Direct Time Write  
The time engine accumulator can be written and read through the TIME register. The time is in 1588 standard  
format: 48 bits of seconds and 30 bits of nanoseconds. When such a write is done, the time engine instantaneously  
42  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
jumps to the new time. (Note: this, in turn, can cause instantaneous phase changes in periodic signals generated  
by the programmable event generators.)  
6.13.1.2  
Frequency Control  
The frequency of the time engine can be changed by writing the period to the PERIOD register. The period register  
is in units of ns and has 8 integer bits and 32 fractional bits (lsb is 2-32ns).  
6.13.1.3  
Precise Time Adjustment  
The time adjustment control provides a hardware-controlled method to change the time slowly over a large number  
of reference clock cycles. In a time adjustment operation, an offset is temporarily added to the period for a specific  
number of reference clock cycles. After that number of cycles, the period reverts back to the value stored in the  
PERIOD register and the latched status bit PTP_IR.TAC is set. Using this time adjustment control, a specific time  
change can be made slowly over hundreds, thousands or millions of reference clock cycles. A time adjustment  
operation is started by writing the period adjustment and cycle count to the PER_ADJ and ADJ_CNT registers,  
respectively. The period adjustment is in units of ns and has 8 integer bits and 32 fractional bits (lsb is 2-32ns). The  
cycle count is a 24-bit unsigned integer. The magnitude of the period adjustment must be less than half of the  
PERIOD register setting for the time adjustment function to work reliably.  
As an example of a time adjustment operation, if the period adjustment is set to +1.50 nanoseconds for 1,000,000  
clock periods (8ms total duration) the period adjustment register would be set to 0x01,8000,0000, the cycle count  
register would be set to 0x0F4240 (1,000,000), and the resulting time shift would be -1.50 milliseconds.  
6.13.1.4  
External Clock Syntonization  
If needed, the time engine can be syntonized with an external clock signal on one of the GPIO pins. When  
PTPCR3.EXT_CLK_ENA=1, PTPCR3.EXT_SRC specifies the GPIO pin on which the clock signal is applied, and  
PTPCR3.EXT_PER specifies the nominal period of the clock after the PTPCR3.EXT_DIV divider. The nominal  
period of the clock out of the EXT_DIV divider must be an integer number of nanoseconds and 8ns (i.e. frequency  
125MHz). If the EXT_CLK frequency is greater than 125MHz at the GPIO pin, PTPCR3.EXT_DIV must be set to  
internally divide the frequency to 125MHz.  
When the external clock mode is enabled, the PERIOD register should be set to the period of the reference clock  
(e.g. 8.0ns for a 125MHz external clock). The external clock logic then dynamically adjusts the time values being  
added to the time engine accumulator to cause time to advance in the accumulator (Figure 6-13) with a long-term  
fractional frequency offset (FFO) equal to the FFO of the EXT_CLK signal plus the FFO expressed in the PERIOD  
register (if any) plus the FFO of the REFCLK signal. For example, if the EXT_CLK signal is 1ppm faster than  
nominal (FFO=+1ppm) and the PERIOD register indicates 8.0ns (i.e. FFO=0ppm) then time advances in the time  
engine at +1ppm plus the FFO of the REFCLK signal.  
Note that the external clock logic does not affect the frequency of the time engine's 125MHz reference clock signal;  
it only affects the rate that time advances in the time engine accumulator. It also doesn't affect the frequency of any  
of the clocks generated by the TX PLL. It does affect the output clock generator (section 6.13.2) and programmable  
event generators (section 6.13.3), and output signals from these blocks do have the same FFO as the time engine  
accumulator.  
As the frequency of the EXT_CLK signal changes, the external clock logic dynamically adjusts the period value  
being added to the time accumulator to track the frequency changes. The PTPCR3.EXT_LIM field specifies the  
maximum number of nanoseconds to adjust the period value vs. the value in the PERIOD register. If larger offsets  
than the value specified by the EXT_LIM field are required, the required adjustments are accumulated in the  
external clock logic and then added to the time accumulator at the EXT_LIM rate. The effect of this behavior is that  
output signals derived from the time engine follow frequency changes on the EXT_CLK signal with a reaction  
speed limited by the EXT_LIM value.  
The external clock tracking logic generates approximately 2ns of phase noise on MAX24288 output signals vs.  
approximately 1ns in other modes of operation.  
43  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Note that another way to syntonize the time engine to a clock signal is to use the clock signal as MAX24288's  
REFCLK signal, since the time engine's reference clock is derived from the REFCLK signal. Using this approach  
also syntonizes the transmit bit clock of the high-speed serial interface, since that clock is created by the same PLL  
(the TX PLL, see Figure 6-12).  
6.13.2 Output Clock Generator  
The primary frequency output from the 1588 time engine is the PTP_CLKO signal. PTP_CLKO can be configured  
to be 125/MHz n where n = 1 to 255 as set by PTPCR2.CLKO_DIV. Typical PTP_CLKO frequencies are  
125MHz, 62.5MHz, 31.25MHz, 25MHz, 5MHz and 1MHz. PTP_CLKO can be inverted by setting  
PTPCR2.CLKO_INV=1.  
Whenever the 1588 time engine is synchronized to a time or frequency master, PTP_CLKO is, by extension,  
syntonized to the frequency of the master. Note that the frequency of PTP_CLKO is immediately affected by all  
1588 time engine controls: direct time write, period adjustment, and time adjustment.  
The output jitter of PTP_CLKO is approximately 1ns. To achieve this level of jitter when clocking the 1588 time  
engine with a 125MHz (8ns) reference clock, eight phases of the reference clock are used, effectively giving a  
1GHz reference clock from which to synthesize PTP_CLKO.  
PTP_CLKO can be made available on any of general-purpose I/O pins GPO2, GPIO2, or GPIO4-7 by configuring  
GPIOCR1 and/or GPIOCR2 appropriately.  
6.13.3 Programmable Event Generators  
The MAX24288 has two identical programmable event generators (PEGs). Each of these PEGs can be configured  
to generate output signals with time-triggered rising or falling edges. PEG output signals can be non-periodic  
control signals, 50% duty cycle clock signals, or periodic pulses, such as a one pulse per second (1PPS) signal.  
For each PEG, one or more GPIO pins must be configured using the appropriate field in GPIOCR1 or GPIOCR2 to  
output the PEG signal.  
Each PEG has a controller that accepts commands written to a 22-bit-wide, 16-word-deep FIFO that stores multiple  
event generation commands. As shown in Table 6-18, bits 15:0 of each 22-bit word are a 16-bit time field or repeat  
count. Bits 19:16 are a command code (see Table 6-19). Bit 20 specifies GPIO pin behavior after the event:  
continue to drive or go high impedance. Bit 21 marks the event command as one for which the PEG controller must  
set the PTP_IR.P1EC or P2EC latched status bit when it has completed the command.  
Table 6-18. PEG Command FIFO Fields  
FIFO Bits  
Field  
Description  
21  
Stat  
When this bit is set, the PEG controller sets the P1EC or P2EC latched status  
bit after the event command is completed. This can be used, for example, to  
interrupt software on one-second boundaries.  
20  
Disable  
0 = Output pin continues to drive the last level (high or low) after the event  
1 = Output pin goes high impedance one reference clock (8ns) after the event.  
4-bit event command code. See Table 6-19 for commands.  
16-bit data. See Table 6-19 for descriptions of what the data means for each  
command code.  
(After Event)  
Command  
Data  
19:16  
15:0  
44  
 
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Table 6-19. PEG Commands  
FIFO[19:16]  
Command Description  
Command  
Repeat. Let N=FIFO[3:0] and M=FIFO[15:4]. Repeat the last N FIFO entries M times. M=0 indicates repeat  
forever (simple clock mode) until a new command is written to the PEG FIFO.  
0000  
Fractional Clock Synthesis Repeat. Let M1=FIFO[15:8] and M2=FIFO[7:0]. Repeat last 4 FIFO entries  
forever. Two structures are possible here for the previous 4 FIFO entries:  
(1) Four 16-bit relative-time toggle commands (command=1111). Words 1 and 2 are repeated M1 times  
0001  
then words 3 and 4 are repeated M2 times.  
(2) Two 32-bit relative-time toggle commands (command=1110). The 32-bit command in words 1 and 2 is  
repeated 2*M1 times then the 32-bit command in words 3 and 4 is repeated 2*M2 times.  
In both cases the pattern is repeated forever until a new command is written to the PEG FIFO.  
Set Absolute Time Reference. Set the PEG’s absolute time reference point to the time engine’s current  
time. The next relative time command will be relative to this reference point. FIFO[15:0] ignored.  
Undefined  
0010  
0011  
01xx  
10xx  
11xx  
xx00 (xx¹00)  
Create Positive Edge  
Create Negative Edge  
Toggle (Create Opposite Edge)  
Undefined  
These three values of FIFO[19:18] are combined with the three values  
of FIFO[17:16]=01, 10 or 11 (described below) to create time-triggered  
edge placements in the PEG output signal.  
Absolute time value. First word of 5-word, 48-bit absolute time value.  
FIFO[15:0]: Word 1 = seconds[47:32], word 2 = seconds[31:16], word 3 = seconds[15:0], word 4 =  
ns[29:16], word 5 = ns[15:0]. The command field (FIFO[19:16]) of words 2 through 5 is don’t-care  
(recommended value: same as word 1)  
xx01 (xx¹00)  
32-bit relative time value. First word of 2-word relative time value.  
FIFO[15:0]: Word 1 = ns[29:16], word 2 =ns[15:0]. The command field (FIFO[19:16]) of word 2 is don’t-care  
(recommended value: same as word 1).  
16-bit relative time value. Single-word relative time value, FIFO[15:0] is ns[15:0].  
xx10 (xx¹00)  
xx11 (xx¹00)  
An absolute time command (xx01) or the Set Absolute Time Reference command (0010) must be used before  
relative time commands (xx10 or xx11) can be used. Relative commands create an event at a time relative to the  
previous event (the previous event can be absolute or relative).  
When PEGCR.P1RES or P2RES is set to 1, the resolution of the 32-bit and 16-bit relative time values is increased  
by a factor of 256, giving a resolution of 1/256 (i.e. 2-8) nanoseconds. This is used to generate a signal with a  
period that is not an integer number of nanoseconds. The P1RES or P2RES bit must remain unchanged for the  
duration of a repeat or fractional synthesis repeat command.  
The control bits PEGCR.P1RST and P2RST are used to reset the PEGs. When a PEG is reset, its command FIFO  
is emptied, its control logic is reset, and its output signal is driven low.  
The control bits PEGCR.P1DIS and P2DIS prevent the PEG from moving to the next command in the PEG FIFO.  
When PnDIS=1, the PEG continues to execute any command or group of commands (grouped by repeat or  
fractional clock synthesis repeat commands) already being executed, but it cannot proceed to the next command  
until PnDIS is set to 0. This feature is valuable for ensuring that repeat groups are completely loaded into the FIFO  
before being executed by the PEG.  
Real-time status bits PTP_SR.P1FF and P2FF indicate when the PEG command FIFOs are full. System software  
should monitor these bits to prevent FIFO overflow.  
The PEG1 Command FIFO is written through the PEG1_FIFO register. The PEG2 Command FIFO is written  
through the PEG2_FIFO register.  
The PEG Repeat command can be used to make periodic signals with periods that are integer multiples of 2ns  
(PEGCR.PnRES=0) or 2/256ns (PEGCR.PnRES=1). The basic idea is to first set an absolute reference and then  
repeat a toggle command at a relative time equal to half the period of the desired signal. As an example, to  
generate a 50% duty cycle 25MHz clock using PEG1, follow these steps:  
45  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
1. Set PEGCR.P1DIS=1.  
2. Write 0x20000 to the PEG1 FIFO (Set Absolute Time Reference command).  
3. Write 0xF0014 to the PEG1 FIFO (Toggle command, 16-bit relative time, 20ns half cycle).  
4. Write 0x00001 to the PEG1 FIFO (Repeat command, repeat previous 1 FIFO entry forever).  
5. Set PEGCR.P1DIS=0.  
As another example, to generate a one pulse per second (1PPS) signal with a 50ns wide pulse using PEG2, the  
basic idea is to first generate a rising edge at the next 1 second boundary (absolute time). Then repeat forever  
these two edge placements: a toggle command 50ns later followed by another toggle command 1 second minus  
50ns later. Specifically, follow these steps:  
1. Set PEGCR.P2DIS=1.  
2. Write 0x50000 to the PEG2 FIFO (Create Positive Edge command, 48-bit absolute time, sec[47:32])  
3. Write 0x50000 to the PEG2 FIFO (sec[31:16] for above command)  
4. Write 0x50000 to the PEG2 FIFO (sec[15:0] for above command)  
5. Write 0x50000 to the PEG2 FIFO (ns[31:16] for above command)  
6. Write 0x50000 to the PEG2 FIFO (ns[15:0] for above command)  
7. Write 0xF0032 to the PEG2 FIFO (Toggle command, 16-bit relative time, 50ns)  
8. Write 0xE3B9A to the PEG2 FIFO (Toggle command, 32-bit relative time, 999,999,950ns)  
9. Write 0x0C9CE to the PEG2 FIFO (ns[15:0] for above command)  
10. Write 0x00003 to the PEG2 FIFO (Repeat command, repeat previous 3 FIFO entries, i.e. the two  
Toggle commands, forever)  
11. Set PEGCR.P2DIS=0.  
Note that in steps 2, 3 and 4 the seconds value would have to be set to a specific one-second period in the near  
future for the example to work correctly.  
The PEG toggle and repeat commands for other common frequencies are shown in Table 6-20.  
Table 6-20. Common Frequencies Using Repeat Command  
Toggle Command  
FIFO[19:16]  
Command  
0xE  
Repeat  
Command  
0x00002  
Frequency  
1 Hz  
Half Period (ns)  
500,000,000  
FIFO[15:0] Hex  
0x1DCD  
0x6500  
PnRES bit  
0
8 KHz  
1MHz  
2.048MHz  
10MHz  
25MHz  
0xF  
0xF  
0xF  
0xF  
0xF  
62,500  
500  
62,500/256  
50  
0xF424  
0x01F4  
0xF424  
0x0032  
0x00001  
0x00001  
0x00001  
0x00001  
0x00001  
0
0
1
0
0
20  
0x0014  
The PEG Fractional Clock Synthesis Repeat command adds additional frequency capabilities. See the description  
of this command in Table 6-19. The generated jitter is minimized by the PEG internally repeating 1/16 of M1 then  
1/16 of M2 in an alternating manner. This jitter is high frequency and therefore easily filtered by downstream PLLs.  
The numbers M1 and M2 are adhered to precisely to get an exact synthesis, even if M1 and M2 are not integer  
multiples of 16. The 1/256 resolution can be applied by setting PEGCR.P1RES or P2RES to 1 if needed.  
Table 6-21 shows how to use the fractional clock synthesis repeat command to create common telecom  
frequencies (with P1RES or P2RES set to 1). FIFO Entries 1 through 4 are relative-time toggle commands.  
Table 6-21. Common Frequencies Using Fractional Clock Synthesis Repeat Command  
FREQ  
M1  
1
155  
86  
M2  
2
88  
107  
FIFO Entry 1  
16+ 70/256 ns  
25 + 184/256ns  
FIFO Entry 2  
16+ 70/256 ns  
25 + 184/256ns  
FIFO Entry 3  
16+ 71/256 ns  
25 + 185/256ns  
FIFO Entry 4  
16+ 71/256 ns  
25 + 185/256ns  
30.720MHz  
19.440MHz  
1.544MHz  
323 + 213/256 ns (32-bit Command)  
323 + 214/256 ns (32-bit Command)  
46  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Notes: The closest spacing of a relative edge to the previous event is 16ns (two 125MHz reference clock periods).  
Also, the highest frequency periodic signal that a PEG can produce is one fourth of the reference clock frequency  
(e.g. 31.25MHz for a 125MHz reference clock).  
A PEG can also be used to encode a data value as a pulse of a specific width. A second device can then use input  
signal timestamping (section 6.13.4) to determine the width and decode the value. As an example, pulse width  
could be used to encode 8 bits of data per pulse using pulse_width =n*32 + 64 ns which creates pulse widths from  
64ns to 8,224ns (255*32+64). Thirty-two bits of data can then be sent as four separate pulses. This method can be  
a useful way to convey the exact time at the one-second boundary from a time master to a time slave in the same  
system using the wire that already carries the 1 pulse per second signal or other time alignment signal.  
6.13.4 Input Signal Timestamping  
Any of the three timestampers in the MAX24288 (TS1, TS2 or TS3) can timestamp edges of an input signal (rising,  
falling or both). This feature can be used in a wide variety of applications to timestamp signals from sensors or  
other ICs in the system to note the precise time something important happens.  
In addition, this feature can be used to time-align the MAX24288's time engine to another component in the  
system. This can be necessary, for instance, when the MAX24288 is a timestamper on one card in a multicard  
and/or multiport switch or router. Typically, such a system is required to perform as a 1588 boundary clock or  
transparent clock in which packets are timestamped at the MII interfaces of multiple ports. In such a system it is  
important that all the timestampers have a common understanding of the current time. The easiest, most accurate  
way to achieve this is to have each timestamper time-locked to a time alignment signal from a central 1588 clock.  
Aligning the time engine to a time alignment signal involves these concepts:  
Configure the source of the time alignment signal to output a signal with a rising or falling edge at an exact  
time boundary, such as a 1 pulse per second (1 PPS) signal that goes high at the start of each second.  
Apply that signal to the MAX24288 on the GPIO pin specified by TSCR.TS1SRC_SEL (this example  
presumes the use of TS1). Also, configure the GPIO pin as an input by setting GPIOCR1.GPIOn_SEL=0.  
Configure the timestamper to timestamp the significant edge of the time alignment signal  
(TSCR.TS1_EDGE=01 or 10).  
System software then looks for an input signal timestamp by polling the MAX24288's real-time status bit  
PTP_SR.TS1_NE or waiting for an interrupt generated by latched status register PTP_IR.TS1_NE.  
Software reads the timestamp from the FIFO as described in the TS1_FIFO register description.  
Finally, software implements a PLL phase detector by calculating the difference between the timestamp  
and the expected value, implements the desired PLL loop filter behavior, and controls the time engine  
using any of the three controls described in section 6.13.1 (typically frequency/period).  
This process is repeated continually for each significant edge of the input time alignment signal.  
As shown in Table 7-3, when an input signal timestamp is read from a timestamp FIFO, bit 15 of TEIO5 indicates  
the polarity of the input signal edge: 0=falling, 1=rising.  
Each timestamper has an eight entry FIFO. Software must be able to read timestamps out of the FIFO faster than  
the expected time alignment signal frequency to avoid FIFO overflow. Timestamper FIFO overflow is signaled by  
latched status bit PTP_IR.TSn_OF and can generate an interrupt if configured to do so. PTP_SR.TSn_NE provides  
real-time FIFO empty/not-empty status. A transition from FIFO empty to FIFO not-empty is signaled by latched  
status bit PTP_IR.TSn_NE, which can also generate an interrupt if configured.  
47  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
For applications that need to use a timestamper to lock to an input clock signal, the signal going to the TS1  
timestamper can be internally divided down by one or both of the TS1 dividers (configured by TS1_DIV1 and  
TSCR.TS1_DIV2. This frequency division reduces the number of edges that must be timestamped to avoid  
overflowing the timestamp FIFO.  
The precision of input signal timestamps is 1ns (using eight phases of the 125MHz reference clock). The pulse  
width of the input time alignment signal can be very small (less than 10 ns) when only one edge is timestamped.  
When both edges are timestamped, it must be 24ns.  
6.13.5 Packet Timestamping  
Timestampers TS2 and TS3 can be configured to timestamp the start of egress and ingress packets when  
TSCR.TS2SRC_SEL=0 and TSCR.TS3SRC_SEL=0, respectively. In this mode, the start of every packet is  
timestamped, but only PTP packets that are qualified by the packet classifier (section 6.13.6) and have suitable  
event types (section 6.13.6.3) have their timestamps (1) saved to a timestamp FIFO for system software to read,  
(2) written into the packet itself (section 6.13.7) or (3) used to update the PTPv2 correction field (section 6.13.7).  
The precision of the timestamps is 1ns, which is achieved by looking for the start of packet in the 1.25Gbps serial  
domain and using eight phases of the 125MHz reference clock. Timestamps are formatted as specified by  
IEEE1588 with a 48-bit seconds field and a 30-bit nanoseconds field (see Table 7-3).  
IEEE1588 specifies the timestamping instant for an ingress or egress packet to be the instant when the first bit  
after the Ethernet start-of-frame delimiter crosses the reference plane marking the boundary between the PTP  
node and the network. Since the MAX24288 timestampers are not ideally located at the reference plane, the  
timestamps they generate must be corrected for ingress and egress latencies as described in IEEE1588v2 section  
7.3.4.2. These latencies are the sum of the latency of the electrical or optical PHY on the network side of the  
MAX24288 and the latency of the MAX24288 from the high-speed 1000BASE-X/SGMII pins to the transmit and  
receive start-of-packet (SOP) detectors. MAX24288 latencies are shown in section 9.3.10. Correction for these  
latencies can be done by system software or by using MAX24288 on-the-fly corrections as described in section  
6.13.7.6.  
When a packet timestamp is written to a timestamp FIFO, packet identification information is also written to the  
FIFO. This ID information consists of 4-bit message type, 16-bit sequence ID, and 12-bit identity code. The  
message type field is the lower 4 bits of the control field for a 1588v1 message, or the 4-bit messageType field for a  
1588v2 message. The 16-bit sequence ID field is the sequenceId field from the PTP message header for both  
1588v1 and 1588v2 messages.  
By default (PTPCR1.VID2FIFO=0), the 12-bit identity code is the 12-bit sum of bytes 20 to 29 of the PTP message  
header. These bytes contain the sourcePortIdentity field in 1588v2 packets or the msgType,  
sourceCommunicationTechnology and sourceUuid fields in 1588v1 packets. This sum provides a simple and  
effective hash code that is unlikely to produce the same value for two or more values of the 10-byte field. When  
PTPCR1.VID2FIFO=1, the 12-bit identity code is the packet's outermost VLAN ID.  
The message type, sequence ID and identity code fields can be read from the FIFO through the HDR_DAT1 and  
HDR_DAT2 registers. When timestamper TS2 or TS3 is configured to timestamp packets, HDR_DAT1 and  
HDR_DAT2 are updated at the same time that the TEIO registers are updated when the FIFO for that timestamper  
is read (TERW.RD=1 and TERW.RDSEL=010 or 011).  
6.13.6 Packet Classification  
The MAX24288 has two packet classifiers (PC), one ingress and one egress. Each packet classifier examines  
packet headers and qualifies suitable PTP packets. Each PC has built-in understanding of Ethernet headers, VLAN  
tags, 802.1ah MAC-in-MAC, MEF headers, MPLS tags, and IPv4/UDP and IPv6/UDP headers. The PC can be  
configured to identify PTP event packets carried by layer 2 Ethernet frames, MEF frames, MPLS or IP/UDP  
packets.  
48  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
The PC can identify PTPv2 packets, PTPv1 packets or both and also supports future versions of PTP. Using the  
PKT_CLASS.PTP_VERSION and VER_EXACT fields, the PC can be configured to timestamp only packets with  
one specified version number or any version number less than or equal to a specified version number.  
To handle MAC-in-MAC as defined in IEEE 802.1ah, when the I-TAG Ethertype 0x88E7 is detected the PC skips  
the following 4 bytes of I-TAG information and then examines the header fields of the inner Ethernet frame. The PC  
can navigate multiple levels of MAC-in-MAC nesting.  
The PC also can traverse multiple levels of VLAN tags. A VLAN tag is indicated by any of the standard VLAN  
Ethertypes 0x8100, 0x88A8, 0x9100, 0x9200 and 0x9300 or the optional value set in the VLAN2_ID register. When  
a VLAN Ethertype is detected, the PC skips the next 2 bytes of VLAN information and then examines the next  
Ethertype location. The PC can navigate any combination of VLAN and MAC-in-MAC Ethertypes.  
For MPLS, the PC can traverse stacked MPLS tags to find the innermost tag. The start of a 32-bit MPLS tag is  
indicated by the MPLS multicast Ethertype 0x8848 or the MPLS unicast Ethertype 0x8847. If S=0 in an MPLS tag  
(indicating it is not the innermost tag), then the tag is skipped and the next tag is examined. If S=1 in the MPLS tag  
(the innermost tag), then when PKT_CLASS.MPLS_MCAST=1 or MPLS_UCAST=1, the packet classifier  
compares the 20-bit MPLS label with the MPLS_LABEL registers as a qualification criterion.  
The PC has both hardwired logic and configurable logic available to perform the packet classification process.  
These are discussed in sections 6.13.6.1 and 6.13.6.2 below.  
Note: To minimize packet classification errors during configuration register changes, PTPCR1.PC_PM_DIS should  
be set before modifying PC configuration registers and then cleared after all registers changes have been made.  
6.13.6.1 Hardwired Packet Classifier (HPC)  
The hardwired packet classifier can be configured to look for and qualify PTP messages carried by layer 2 Ethernet  
frames, MEF frames, MPLS or IP/UDP packets using the bit fields in the PKT_CLASS register. The pseudocode  
below describes HPC operation. To keep the text below straightforward, VLAN tags and MAC-in-MAC are not  
discussed. The HPC, however, does navigate VLAN tags and MAC-in-MAC nesting to find the PTP message, as  
described above.  
PTP over IEEE802.3 Ethernet, Standard Ethertype  
IF PKT_CLASS.ENET=1 AND Ethertype = 0x88F7 (PTP Ethertype) THEN  
A PTP message starts at the byte following the Ethertype.  
IF versionPTP matches PKT_CLASS.PTP_VERSION THEN  
Packet Qualifies  
PTP over IEEE802.3 Ethernet, Alternate Ethertype  
IF PKT_CLASS.ENET_CFG=1 AND Ethertype = ETYPE_ALT THEN  
A PTP message starts at the byte following the Ethertype.  
IF versionPTP matches PKT_CLASS.PTP_VERSION THEN  
Packet Qualifies  
PTP over UDP/IPv4/Ethernet  
IF PKT_CLASS.UDP_IPv4=1 _  
AND Ethertype=0x0800 (IPv4) _  
AND IPv4 Protocol field = 0x11 (UDP)  
AND (UDP_SRC=0xFFFF OR UDP Source Port = UDP_SRC) _  
AND (UDP_DST=0xFFFF OR UDP Destination Port = UDP_DST) THEN  
A PTP message starts at the byte following the UDP header.  
IF versionPTP matches PKT_CLASS.PTP_VERSION THEN  
49  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Packet Qualifies  
PTP over UDP/IPv6/Ethernet  
IF PKT_CLASS.UDP_IPv6=1 _  
AND Ethertype=0x86DD (IPv6) _  
AND IPv6 Next Header field= 0x11 (UDP)  
AND (UDP_SRC=0xFFFF OR UDP Source Port = UDP_SRC) _  
AND (UDP_DST=0xFFFF OR UDP Destination Port = UDP_DST) THEN  
A PTP message starts at the byte following the UDP header.  
IF versionPTP matches PKT_CLASS.PTP_VERSION THEN  
Packet Qualifies  
PTP over MPLS Multicast over Ethernet  
IF PKT_CLASS.MPLS_MCAST =1 _  
AND Ethertype=0x8848 (MPLS Multicast) _  
AND MPLS Inner Label=MPLS_LABEL THEN  
A PTP message starts at the byte following the MPLS inner label.  
IF versionPTP matches PKT_CLASS.PTP_VERSION THEN  
Packet Qualifies  
PTP over MPLS Unicast over Ethernet  
IF PKT_CLASS.MPLS_UCAST =1 _  
AND Ethertype=0x8847 (MPLS Multicast) _  
AND MPLS Inner Label=MPLS_LABEL THEN  
A PTP message starts at the byte following the MPLS inner label.  
IF versionPTP matches PKT_CLASS.PTP_VERSION THEN  
Packet Qualifies  
PTP over MEF  
IF PKT_CLASS.MEF_CFG =1 _  
AND Ethertype=0x88D8 (MEF-8 CES) _  
AND MEF ECID field = MEF_ECID THEN  
A PTP message starts at the byte following the MEF header.  
IF versionPTP matches PKT_CLASS.PTP_VERSION THEN  
Packet Qualifies  
6.13.6.2  
Configurable Packet Classifier (CPC)  
The configurable packet classifier logic can be used to set up qualification criteria other than those done by the  
HPC. There are two ways to use the CPC criteria:  
"AND" them with HPC criteria to add more criteria that have to be met to qualify a packet.  
"OR" them with HPC criteria starting at a specific point in the packet headers (the CPC start position) to  
provide an alternate set of qualification criteria.  
The choice of AND mode vs. OR mode is set by the PKT_CLASS.CFG_OR bit. These modes are discussed in  
more detail below.  
In both modes a key reference point is the CPC start position specified in PKT_CLASS.CFG_START. Table 6-22  
lists the possible CPC start positions.  
50  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Table 6-22. Configurable Packet Classifier Start Positions  
CFG_START  
CPC Start Position  
0
1
Disabled  
Start at the beginning of the packet  
Start after first Ethertype that is not a VLAN Ethertype and not an I-TAG Ethertype (i.e. not  
0x8100, 0x88A8, 0x88E7, 0x9100, 0x9200, 0x9300)  
Start after PTP Ethertype (0x88F7)  
Start after the configurable Ethertype specified by ETYPE_ALT  
Start after MEF Ethertype (0x88D8)  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Start after either MPLS Ethertype (0x8847 or 0x8848)  
Start after MPLS unicast Ethertype (0x8847)  
Start after IPv4 Ethertype (0x0800)  
9
Start after IPv6 Ethertype (0x86DD)  
10  
Start after MEF header  
Start after MPLS inner label specified by MPLS_LABEL following either MPLS Ethertype  
(0x8847 or 0x8848)  
Starts after MPLS inner label specified by MPLS_LABEL following MPLS unicast Ethertype  
(0x8847)  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Start after IPv4/UDP header  
Start after IPv6/UDP header  
Start after either IPv4/UDP or IPv6/UDP header  
The CPC has eight bit-maskable 16-bit matching criteria, any or all of which can be used to set up packet  
qualification criteria. Each of the criteria has a programmable offset relative to the CPC start position.  
A CPC matching field is configured for use by following these steps:  
1. Specify which bits should be compared in the CFG_MASK register.  
2. Specify the required values of the bits to be compared in the CFG_MATCH register.  
3. Specify the offset from the CPC start position to the comparison point in the CFG_OFFSET register and  
set CFG_OFFSET.ENABLE=1.  
4. Write the CFG_WR register with the number of the CPC matching field (0-7) in the CFG_SEL field and  
WR=1.  
6.13.6.2.1 AND Mode  
In AND mode (PKT_CLASS.CFG_OR=0) a packet must meet HPC criteria AND must meet all enabled CPC  
criteria to be qualified. AND mode can be used, for example, to add criteria for acceptable Ethernet destination  
address and/or IP destination address (or ranges of addresses).  
For CFG_START values 3 through 15 (see Table 6-22), the CPC criteria are tied to a particular protocol stack  
specified by the CFG_START value. The CPC criteria are, therefore, only applied to packets with that protocol  
stack. For example, if CFG_START=8 ("starts after IPv4 Ethertype") then only packets with an IPv4 Ethertype  
would be further qualified by the CPC criteria.  
If CFG_START=1 ("starts at the beginning of the packet") then all packets are further qualified by the CPC criteria,  
which can be useful for Ethernet address criteria, for example.  
Note that in AND mode the PTP_OFFSET indirect register (used in OR mode) is ignored because the start of the  
PTP header is determined by the HPC by examining packet header fields.  
51  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
6.13.6.2.2 OR Mode  
In OR mode (PKT_CLASS.CFG_OR=1) a packet is qualified if it meets any of the HPC criteria enabled in the  
PKT_CLASS register (i.e. normal HPC operation) OR it meets HPC criteria up to the CPC start position and then  
meets CPC criteria thereafter.  
For CFG_START values 3 through 15 (see Table 6-22), the CPC criteria are tied to a particular Ethertype or  
packet header (specified by the CFG_START value) being present in the packet prior to the CPC start position.  
The CPC criteria are, therefore, only applied to packets that have that Ethertype or packet header prior to the CPC  
start position.  
The following is an example CPC configuration to qualify packets with a PTP-over-IPv4/UDP-over-MPLS-over-  
Ethernet protocol stack. It first uses HPC criteria for MPLS-over-Ethernet and then uses three configurable  
matching criteria to look for IPVER=IPv4, IPv4 Protocol=UDP and UDP Destination Port=319 (PTP) after the MPLS  
inner label.  
PKT_CLASS.CFG_OR=1  
PKT_CLASS.CFG_START = 12 (CPC start position is after MPLS inner label for MPLS unicast)  
CFG_MATCH = 0x4000 (IPVER = IPv4)  
CFG_MASK  
= 0xF000  
CFG_OFFSET = 0x8000 + 0  
CFG_WR  
= 0x0080 (write to criterion 1)  
CFG_MATCH = 0x0011 (IPv4 protocol = UDP)  
CFG_MASK  
= 0x00FF  
CFG_OFFSET = 0x8000 + 8  
CFG_WR  
= 0x0081 (write to criterion 2)  
CFG_MATCH = 0x013F (UDP destination port = 319)  
CFG_MASK  
= 0xFFFF  
CFG_OFFSET = 0x8000 + 22(decimal)  
CFG_WR = 0x0082 (write to criterion 3)  
CFG_OFFSET = 28  
CFG_WR  
= 0x008F (write to PTP_OFFSET register)  
In this example if the HPC finds a packet with MPLS unicast Ethertype and MPLS inner label equal to  
MPLS_LABEL then the HPC triggers the CPC to further qualify the packet. If the CPC finds that the packet  
matches all three configured criteria then it declares the packet qualified.  
Note that if PKT_CLASS.MPLS_UCAST=1 and the MAX24288 is configured as described in the example above,  
then packets can have a PTP-over-MPLS-over-Ethernet protocol stack (qualified by the HPC only) OR a PTP-over-  
IPv4/UDP-over-MPLS-over-Ethernet protocol stack (qualified by a combination of the HPC and the CPC). The  
ability to qualify packets with one OR the other of these protocol stacks (OR other protocol stacks if enabled in  
PKT_CLASS) illustrates OR mode. If, in contrast, PKT_CLASS.MPLS_UCAST=0, then packets with the PTP-over-  
MPLS-over-Ethernet protocol stack are not qualified, but packets with the PTP-over-IPv4/UDP-over-MPLS-over-  
Ethernet protocol stack are still qualified.  
If CFG_START=1 ("starts at the beginning of the packet") then the CPC criteria are applied starting at the  
beginning of the packet and therefore provide a qualification path that is entirely independent of the HPC. In this  
case, packets are qualified if they meet the CPC criteria OR they meet the HPC criteria enabled in the  
PKT_CLASS register.  
One additional parameter must be set to use OR mode. While the HPC operating alone on supported protocol  
stacks can locate the start of the PTP header by examining fields in lower-layer protocols (e.g. IP Protocol field,  
52  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
UDP Destination Port), the CPC does not have this ability. In OR mode, therefore, the offset from the CPC start  
position to the start of the PTP message header must be written to the PTP_OFFSET register. Note that  
PTP_OFFSET=0 is invalid. OR mode scenarios where PTP_OFFSET=0 is desired can be done in AND mode  
instead.  
In OR mode packets that meet all HPC and CPC criteria up to the beginning of the PTP header must also meet this  
PTP header criteria to be qualified: versionPTP matches PKT_CLASS.PTP_VERSION.  
6.13.6.3 PTP Message Type Checking, Timestamp FIFOs  
A packet declared to be qualified by the HPC and/or CPC, as described in sections 6.13.6.1 and 6.13.6.2, is  
eligible for timestamping or on-the-fly modification. Which qualified packets actually have their timestamps written  
to the timestamp FIFO or modified on-the-fly is determined by the packet's PTP message type and by the settings  
of the TS_FIFO_EN and TS_INSERT_EN register fields.  
For PTP version 1 packets (versionPTP field=1), the control field is examined to determine the PTP message type.  
Message types 0 (Sync) and 1 (Delay_Req) are PTP event messages that normally are timestamped.  
For PTP version 2 packets (versionPTP field = 2), the messageType field is examined to determine the PTP  
message type. Message types 0 to 7 are classified as PTP event messages that normally are timestamped. In  
1588v2, the event message types are as follows:  
0: Sync  
1: Delay_Req  
2: Pdelay_Req  
3: Pdelay_Resp  
4 to 7: Reserved for future PTP event message types  
Note that only the control field (1588v1) or the messageType field (1588v2) is examined by the timestamping logic  
to determine message type. The PTP message type is not determined from UDP port number.  
The TS_FIFO_EN register has individual timestamp enable bits for each event message type 0-7 for both the  
egress and ingress packet-flow directions. For example, egress Sync messages (message type 0) have their  
timestamps saved to the TS2 FIFO if the TS_FIFO_EN.EM0_EN bit is set. As another example, ingress Delay_Req  
messages (message type 1) have their timestamps saved to the TS3 FIFO if the TS_FIFO_EN.IM1_EN bit is set.  
The TS_INSERT_EN register has similar enable bits for on-the-fly timestamp insertion, which is described in detail  
in section 6.13.7.  
Each timestamper has an eight-entry FIFO. If a FIFO is used, software must be able to read timestamps out of the  
FIFO faster than the expected packet arrival frequency to avoid FIFO overflow. Timestamper FIFO overflow is  
signaled by latched status bit PTP_IR.TSn_OF and can generate an interrupt if configured to do so.  
PTP_SR.TSn_NE provides real-time FIFO empty/not-empty status. A transition from FIFO empty to FIFO not-  
empty is signaled by latched status bit PTP_IR.TSn_NE, which can also generate an interrupt if configured.  
Note that timestamps are written to the timestamp FIFOs without considering whether the packets have FCS  
errors. System software must read and discard timestamps for packets that are discarded due to FCS error.  
6.13.6.4 Source Port Identity Checking  
For each ingress PTP message a 12-bit identify code is computed from the 10-byte sourcePortIdentity field  
(1588v2) or the messageType, sourceCommunicationTechnology and sourceUuid fields (1588v1). When  
UID_CHK.CHK_EN=1, the computed identity code must match the value stored in UID_CHK.UID for the message  
timestamp to be stored in the TS3 FIFO (if writing to the TS3 FIFO is enabled as described in section 6.13.6.3).  
53  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
6.13.7 On-the-Fly Packet Modification  
The MAX24288 can be configured to perform a variety of 1588-related packet modifications on-the-fly in both  
ingress (serial interface to parallel interface) and egress (parallel to serial) directions:  
Writing Ingress Timestamps Into Ingress PTP Messages (OC, BC, TC)  
Clearing Ingress Timestamps In Egress Messages (BC, TC)  
On-the-Fly Timestamping for Egress Messages (OC or BC)  
One-Step Transparent Clock Residence Time Correction (TC)  
On-the-Fly P2P Transparent Clock Correction for Ingress Link Delay (TC)  
On-the-Fly Correction Field Modification for Asymmetry, Latency (OC, BC, TC)  
Hardwired Ethernet and IP Address Checking and Overwriting  
These on-the-fly packet modifications can be employed in 1588 nodes as shown in Table 6-23.  
Table 6-23. One-Step/On-the-Fly Selection Matrix  
OC or BC OC or BC  
MASTER  
SLAVE  
P2P TC  
E2E TC  
Sync egress one-step timestamping  
V1, V2  
Delay_Req egress one-step timestamping  
Pdelay_Req egress one-step timestamping  
Pdelay_Resp egress one-step timestamping  
Sync ingress timestamp write  
M
M
V2  
M
M
V2  
M
V2  
Delay_Req ingress timestamp write  
M
M
M
Pdelay_Req ingress timestamp write  
Pdelay_Resp ingress timestamp write  
correctionField modification for residence time  
correctionField modification for ingress link delay  
M
M
M
M
V2  
V2  
V2  
V2  
V2  
correctionField modification for asymmetry  
V1=1588v1; V2=1588v2; M=Microsemi method (1588v2 only)  
V2  
V2  
The on-the-fly modifications available in the MAX24288 are discussed in the subsections below. When a packet is  
modified by any of these methods, the Ethernet FCS field is also modified to make a valid packet. In addition, for  
PTP-over-IPv4/UDP packets, the UDP checksum is set to zero (see Note 4 below). For PTPv2-over-IPv6/UDP  
packets, the two bytes of the UDP payload after the end of the PTP message (specified by 1588v2 Annex D for this  
purpose) are modified to make the UDP checksum correct.  
Notes About One-Step/On-the-Fly Corrections:  
1. If the FCS of an Ethernet frame is incorrect before the contents are modified by the MAX24288 then the FCS  
value is left unchanged (i.e. it remains incorrect).  
2. 1588v1 does not specify two extra bytes of UDP payload after the end of the PTP message as 1588v2 does.  
On-the-fly packet modification cannot be supported for PTPv1 over IPv6/UDP since these two bytes aren’t  
guaranteed to be present and therefore cannot be modified to make the UDP checksum correct.  
3. If a PTP message has a correctionField value of 0x7FFF FFFF FFFF FFFF before on-the-fly correction then  
the value is left unchanged. If a computed correctionField value has a magnitude larger than can be  
represented by the correctionField data type then the correctionField is set to 0x7FFF FFFF FFFF FFFF.  
4. If any on-the-fly packet modifications are enabled as described in the subsections below then the packet  
modifier changes the UDP checksum to 0 in any packet that is classified to be PTP-over-UDP/IPv4. This  
happens to each and every PTP-over-UDP/IPv4 packet regardless of whether it is eventually declared to be a  
qualified packet or not. All such packets are affected because the UDP checksum field appears so early in the  
packet that the packet classifier typically has not determined whether the packet is a qualified packet or not  
54  
 
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
before the UDP checksum field is scheduled to exit the packet modification buffer. Therefore, rather than  
causing wrong UDP checksums in some packets, all UDP checksums are set to zero. This action is allowed in  
1588v2 section D.1. Note that this paragraph also applies to circuit emulation packets (see section 6.13.8)  
when PTPCR1.TOP_MODE=1.  
5. To minimize packet modification errors during configuration register changes, PTPCR1.PC_PM_DIS should be  
set before modifying packet modifier (PM) configuration registers and then cleared after all registers changes  
have been made.  
6. Packets in 1588v1 do not have correction fields. Therefore on-the-fly correctionField modification described in  
this section are not made to 1588v1 packets.  
6.13.7.1 Writing Ingress Timestamps Into Ingress PTP Messages (OC, BC, TC)  
The MAX24288 can be configured to write ingress timestamps into qualified ingress PTP messages on-the-fly. This  
removes the need for 1588 software to read ingress timestamps from the TS3 FIFO and match them to received  
messages. It also reduces MDIO or SPI bus transactions accordingly.  
This capability can be enabled selectively for each PTP event message type using the TS_INSERT_EN.IMx_EN  
bits. When any of these bits is set, a 40-byte packet modification buffer and a corresponding fixed 40*8ns=320ns  
delay are added to the ingress data path.  
The seconds and/or nanoseconds fields of the timestamp can be written into each PTP event message. The  
TS_INSERT.SEC_ENA field enables/disables writing seconds information and specifies whether 8 lsbs, 32 lsbs or  
all 48 bits are written. The TS_INSERT.SEC_OFF field specifies the offset in bytes from the start of the PTP  
message header to the point at which the seconds information is to be written. Similarly, the  
TS_INSERT.NSEC_ENA field enables/disables writing the nanoseconds field into the lower 30 bits of a 4-byte  
section of the PTP message starting at the byte offset specified by the TS_INSERT.NSEC_OFF field. The seconds  
and nanoseconds field are each written into the PTP message with the most significant byte closest to the  
beginning of the message.  
In a 1588v2 application, the most straightforward way to use this feature is to write the nanoseconds portion of the  
timestamp into the 4-byte reserved field in the PTP common header at byte offset 16 and write the 8 lsbs of the  
seconds field into the reserved byte in the common header at byte offset 5.  
6.13.7.2 Clearing Ingress Timestamps In Egress Messages (BC, TC)  
When TS_INSERT_EN.CLR_TS_INS=1, the MAX24288 clears the bytes of egress PTP messages that were  
written with timestamp information at ingress as described in section 6.13.7.1. It does this by writing 0x00 to the  
bytes specified by the fields of the TS_INSERT register for all PTP messages regardless of message type. This is  
useful for transparent clock and boundary clock applications where the ingress timestamp information should not  
be propagated with the packet to the next system.  
6.13.7.3 On-the-Fly Timestamping for Egress Messages (OC or BC)  
The MAX24288 supports one-step 1588v2 Sync and Pdelay_Resp messages in the egress direction as described  
in 1588v2. It also supports one-step 1588v1 Sync messages. In both cases, one-step operation means that the  
hardware-generated timestamp for a message is written into the message on-the-fly as it is transmitted. In one-step  
operation, Follow-Up and Pdelay_Resp_Follow_Up messages are not needed and not used, and the twoStepFlag  
field in the Sync and Pdelay_Resp messages is set to 0 by system software when the packets are created.  
In addition, the device also supports an on-the-fly method for timestamping egress 1588v2 Delay_Req and  
Pdelay_Req messages. This behavior is not specified in 1588v2, but it can be enabled and used on a slave port of  
an OC or BC (for Delay_Req messages) or any port of an OC, BC or TC (for Pdelay_Req messages) without any  
changes to any other 1588 network nodes. When one-step/on-the-fly support is enabled for all four event message  
types in the egress direction, the need for system software tor read egress timestamps from the TS2 FIFO is  
eliminated. If the MAX24288 is also configured to write ingress timestamps into ingress PTP messages as  
55  
 
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
described in section 6.13.7.1 then the need for system software to read either of the timestamp FIFOs is  
eliminated. This greatly reduces MDIO or SPI bus transactions between microprocessor and MAX24288.  
The one-step/on-the-fly egress timestamping capability can be enabled selectively for each PTP event message  
type using the four TS_INSERT_EN.EMx_EN bits. When any of these bits is set, a 40-byte packet modification  
buffer and a corresponding fixed 40*8ns=320ns delay are added to the egress data path.  
6.13.7.3.1 One-Step/On-the-Fly Operations on Egress Messages  
The following bullets describe what the MAX24288 does when one-step/on-the-fly operation is enabled for each  
PTP event message type in the egress direction.  
Standard one-step capabilities:  
Sync: hardware timestamp originTimestamp. The egress hardware timestamp is written into the  
originTimestamp field in the Sync message. (1588v1 or v2)  
Pdelay_Resp: correctionField  
+
Pdelay_Resp_Egress_TS  
Pdelay_Req_Ingress_TS  
correctionField. The most recent Pdelay_Req ingress hardware timestamp is subtracted from the egress  
Pdelay_Resp hardware timestamp and the result is added to the correctionField of the Pdelay_Resp  
message. The ingress hardware automatically saves the Pdelay_Req ingress timestamp to an internal  
register for this purpose. (1588v2 only)  
Additional on-the-fly capabilities:  
Delay_Req: correctionField + HW_TS lsbs correctionField. The MAX24288 generates a hardware  
timestamp (HW_TS) and adds the least significant four bits of seconds (converted to nanoseconds) and  
the nanoseconds of the HW_TS to the correctionField of the message. See section 6.13.7.3.2 below for a  
detailed explanation of how this works and how it can be used. (1588v2 only)  
Pdelay_Req: correctionField + HW_TS lsbs correctionField. Same as Delay_Req above. See  
section 6.13.7.3.3 below for a detailed explanation of how this works and how it can be used. (1588v2 only)  
6.13.7.3.2 On-the-Fly Delay_Req Mean Path Delay Calculation  
Figure 6-15. Sync and Delay_Req Tmestamp Points  
t2  
t3  
slave  
Dela  
c
y_  
Req  
Resp  
y_  
yn  
S
Dela  
master  
t1  
t4  
When on-the-fly egress Delay_Req timestamping is enabled, the overall concept is to convey the Delay_Req  
egress timestamp (t3 in Figure 6-15) from the MAX24288 to local 1588 software without storing t3 in a timestamp  
FIFO.  
Normally, according to 1588v2, mean path delay is calculated as follows:  
(1) <meanPathDelay> = [(t2 t3) + (receiveTimestamp of Delay_Resp message(t4) originTimestamp of  
Sync message(t1)) correctionField of Sync message correctionField of Delay_Resp message] / 2  
56  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
After some rearrangement the calculation becomes:  
(2) <meanPathDelay> = [t2 originTimestamp of Sync message(t1) correctionField of Sync message +  
receiveTimestamp of Delay_Resp message(t4) (t3 + correctionField of Delay_Resp message)] / 2  
Since t3 and "correctionField of Delay_Resp message" are added together in equation (2), and since the  
Delay_Resp correctionField is copied from the Delay_Req correctionField by the 1588 master, it is feasible to  
convey the t3 timestamp to the local 1588 software in the correctionField through the Delay_Req/Delay_Resp  
round trip. However, because the format of the correctionField is not large enough to hold an entire timestamp, the  
MAX24288 only adds the least significant four bits of seconds (converted to nanoseconds) and the nanoseconds of  
the t3 timestamp to the egress Delay_Req correctionField. Meanwhile, just before sending the Delay_Req  
message, the local 1588 software must save the upper 44 bits of t3 timestamp seconds as part of a software  
timestamp, SW_TS. This software timestamp must be accurate to within one second.  
When the Delay_Resp message arrives, the local 1588 software performs these calculations:  
convert the Delay_Resp correctionField into seconds (CF.sec) and nanoseconds (CF.ns)  
seconds_diff =CF.sec SW_TS.sec[3:0]  
if seconds_diff < 0 then seconds_diff = seconds_diff + 16 /* to account for sec[3:0] roll-over */  
t3_plus_Delay_Resp_CF.sec[47:0] = SW_TS.sec[47:0] + seconds_diff  
t3_plus_Delay_Resp_CF.ns = CF.ns  
The value t3_plus_Delay_Resp_CF is then used in place of (t3 + correctionField of Delay_Resp message) in the  
meanPathDelay calculation in equation (2).  
Note that using this method has no effect on the normal uses of the Delay_Req and Delay_Resp correctionFields.  
The 1588 slave can add values into the Delay_Req correctionField to correct for any known asymmetries. The  
remote 1588 master behaves normally as described in 1588v2 and copies the Delay_Req correctionField to the  
Delay_Resp correctionField and can add values into the Delay_Resp correctionField to correct for any known  
asymmetries in its data path as well. Furthermore, any transparent clocks in the round-trip path between the slave  
and master can add residence times and peer delays into the correctionField as required.  
6.13.7.3.3 On-the-Fly PDelay_Req Mean Path Delay Calculation  
Figure 6-16. Pdelay Timestamp Points  
t2  
t3  
P
d
q
e
e
lay_  
R
R
lay_  
e
e
sp  
d
P
t1  
t4  
On-the-fly egress Pdelay_Req timestamping is similar to the on-the-fly egress Delay_Req timestamping described  
in section 6.13.7.3.2. In the discussion in this section, note that the timestamps are numbered differently than in  
section 6.13.7.3.2. Each section has numbering that matches numbering in the 1588v2 specification.  
57  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
When on-the-fly egress Pdelay_Req timestamping is enabled, the overall concept is to convey the Pdelay_Req  
egress timestamp (t1 in Figure 6-16) from the MAX24288 to local 1588 software without storing t1 in a timestamp  
FIFO.  
Normally, according to 1588v2, mean path delay is calculated as follows if the twoStepFlag=0 in the Pdelay_Resp  
message:  
(1) <meanPathDelay> = [(t4 t1) correctionField of Pdelay_Resp message] / 2  
After some rearrangement the calculation becomes:  
(2) <meanPathDelay> = [t4 (t1 + correctionField of Pdelay_Resp message)] / 2  
Since t1 and "correctionField of Pdelay_Resp message" are added together in equation (2), and since the  
Pdelay_Resp correctionField is copied from the Pdelay_Req correctionField by the 1588 link partner, it is feasible  
to convey the t1 timestamp from the MAX24288 to the local 1588 software in the correctionField through the  
Pdelay_Req/Pdelay_Resp round trip. However, because the format of the correctionField is not large enough to  
hold an entire timestamp, the MAX24288 only adds the least significant four bits of seconds (converted to  
nanoseconds) and the nanoseconds of the t1 timestamp to the egress Pdelay_Req correctionField. Meanwhile, just  
before sending the Pdelay_Req message, the 1588 software must save the upper 44 bits of t1 timestamp seconds  
as part of a software timestamp, SW_TS. This software timestamp must be accurate to within one second.  
When the Pdelay_Resp message arrives, the 1588 software performs these calculations:  
convert the Pdelay_Resp correctionField into seconds (CF.sec) and nanoseconds (CF.ns)  
seconds_diff =CF.sec SW_TS.sec[3:0]  
if seconds_diff < 0 then seconds_diff = seconds_diff + 16 /* to account for sec[3:0] roll-over */  
t1_plus_Pdelay_Resp_CF.sec[47:0] = SW_TS.sec[47:0] + seconds_diff  
t1_plus_Pdelay_Resp_CF.ns = CF.ns  
The value t1_plus_Pdelay_Resp_CF is then used in place of (t1 + correctionField of Pdelay_Resp message) in the  
meanPathDelay calculation in equation (2).  
Note that using this method has no effect on the normal uses of the Pdelay_Req and Pdelay_Resp  
correctionFields. The 1588 node can add values into the Pdelay_Req correctionField to correct for any known  
asymmetries. The 1588 link partner behaves normally as described in 1588v2 and copies the Pdelay_Req  
correctionField to the Pdelay_Resp correctionField and can add values into the Pdelay_Resp correctionField to  
correct for any known asymmetries in its data path as well.  
The discussion above covers the case where twoStepFlag=0 in the Pdelay_Resp message. This method can be  
shown to work similarly when twoStepFlag=1 in the Pdelay_Resp message.  
6.13.7.4 One-Step Transparent Clock Residence Time Correction (TC)  
The residence time correction behavior described in this section supports residence times of less than or equal to 1  
second.  
Both end-to-end and peer-to-peer transparent clocks must timestamp PTP messages at ingress and egress in  
order to measure and report the residence time of the message in the transparent clock. This residence time is  
used by 1588 slaves (OC and BC) to cancel out the delay caused by the transparent clock. When each transparent  
clock in a 1588 path accurately reports the residence time of each packet, 1588 slaves can cancel out all queuing  
related packet delay for each packet and can therefore cancel out most packet delay variation (PDV). As a result,  
time transfer using 1588 can be much more accurate, slave PDV filtering algorithms can be simplified, and the  
58  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
slave's master oscillator can be less expensive than would be the case if the intermediate nodes in the network  
were not transparent clocks.  
Since residenceTime = egressTimestamp ingressTimestamp, one straightforward way to report residence time is  
to manipulate the correctionField of each message so that hardware at the ingress port calculates correctionField =  
correctionField ingressTimestamp on-the-fly, and hardware at the egress port calculates correctionField =  
correctionField + egressTimestamp on-the-fly.  
The MAX24288 can be configured to do these on-the-fly corrections by setting TS_INSERT_EN.TC_CF_EN=1. By  
default MAX24288 only corrects Sync and Delay_Req event messages in this mode. These are the event message  
types that require residence time correction according to sections 11.5.2.1 and 11.5.3.2 of 1588v2. However, when  
TS_INSERT_EN.TC_CF_PD=1, MAX24288 also corrects Pdelay_Req and Pdelay_Resp event messages as  
described in section 11.5.4.2 of 1588v2. When TS_INSERT_EN.TC_CF_EN is set, a 40-byte packet modification  
buffer and a corresponding fixed 40*8ns=320ns delay are added to the egress data path and to the ingress data  
path.  
Since a correctionField is not large enough to have an entire timestamp added in or subtracted out, the MAX24288  
makes use of the nanoseconds and the least significant four bits of seconds from each timestamp. At ingress the  
nanoseconds field of the ingress timestamp is subtracted from the message's correctionField. At egress the  
nanoseconds field of the egress timestamp is added to the message's correctionField. To detect the case where  
the TC's local time crosses a one-second boundary after the generation of the ingress timestamp but before the  
generation of the egress timestamp, the ingress port hardware forwards four lsbs of ingress timestamp seconds to  
the egress port hardware. The egress port hardware compares the seconds lsbs of the ingress timestamp and the  
egress timestamp and modifies the correctionField appropriately when a one-second boundary crossing is  
detected.  
The four lsbs of ingress timestamp seconds are conveyed in the four msbs of the correctionField. Since these four  
msbs represent corrections > 17,592 seconds, it is expected that they will never convey actual correction field  
information in real networks and therefore can be used temporarily intra-system for this purpose. The egress port  
hardware restores the four msbs of the correctionField by sign-extending the correctionField from bit 59 through bit  
63.  
The ingress and egress hardware have error checking mechanisms that work as follows:  
Ingress or egress: If the correctionField is maximum positive or negative value then it isn't modified.  
Ingress: If after subtracting ingress nanoseconds the upper 5 bits of the correctionField are not all ones or  
all zeroes then the correctionField is set to the maximum value.  
Egress: If residence time is greater than 1 second then the correctionField is set to the maximum value.  
Egress: If the modified correctionField is greater than maximum value then set it to the maximum value.  
Downstream 1588 slaves should discard messages where the correctionField is set to the maximum value 0x7FFF  
FFFF FFFF FFFF (see 1588v2 section 13.3.2.7).  
6.13.7.5 On-the-Fly P2P Transparent Clock Correction for Ingress Link Delay (TC)  
A peer-to-peer transparent clock exchanges Pdelay_Req and Pdelay_Resp messages with a neighboring 1588  
node to calculate the link delay (i.e. meanPathDelay) between the TC and its neighbor. A one-step P2P TC then  
has the responsibility to add the meanPathDelay to the correctionField of ingress Sync messages. This is done in  
MAX24288 hardware on-the-fly by adding the value in the  
MEAN_PATH_DELAY register to the correctionField of ingress Sync packets. There is no enable/disable bit for this  
function. To disable this function when the system is not operating as a P2P TC, set the  
MEAN_PATH_DELAY register value to 0. When  
MEAN_PATH_DELAY¹0, a 40-byte packet modification buffer and a corresponding fixed 40*8ns=320ns delay are  
added to the ingress data path.  
59  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
The mean path delay function can also be used in other ways. For example, in a network without P2P TCs where  
meanPathDelay is calculated from Delay_Req/Delay_Resp packet exchange, a 1588 slave node can write the  
calculated meanPathDelay to the  
MEAN_PATH_DELAY register where it is automatically added to the correctionField of incoming Sync packets.  
The function is also available for other correctionField modification uses as needed.  
6.13.7.6 On-the-Fly Correction Field Modification for Asymmetry, Latency (OC, BC, TC)  
1588 nodes are required to correct for any known asymmetries between the egress direction and the ingress  
direction of a port (155v2 section 11.6). Nodes are also required to correct for egress latency and ingress latency  
as defined in 1588v2 section 7.3.4. These corrections can be done in MAX24288 hardware on-the-fly for any  
combination of event message types in the egress direction, ingress direction or both. To enable this capability, an  
adjustment value is written to one of the three CF_COR registers and then the appropriate fields of the  
CF_INGRESS and CF_EGRESS registers are configured to enable corrections for the desired event message  
types. The CF_COR registers are 2s-complement, and their resolution is 0.25ns. The CF_COR value is added to  
the correctionField for ingress PTP messages and is subtracted from the correctionField for egress PTP messages  
as called for in 1588v2 section 11.6. When any of the CF_INGRESS fields are nonzero, a 40-byte packet  
modification buffer and a corresponding fixed 40*8ns=320ns delay are added to the ingress data path..  
Any of the CF_COR, CF_INGRESS and CF_EGRESS registers can also be used as needed to modify  
correctionFields on-the-fly for reasons other than asymmetry or latency.  
6.13.7.7 Hardwired Ethernet and IP Address Checking and Overwriting  
In some applications, in the ingress path there is a need to change multicast Ethernet and IP addresses to unicast  
so that simple layer 2 Ethernet switches can be used as PTP enabled switches, in particular peer-to-peer  
transparent clock switches.  
Table 6-24 shows the Ethernet, IPv4 and IPv6 multicast addresses used for PTP and the corresponding overwrite  
enable bits in the PTPCR2 register. For the PTPOE or P2POE overwrite bits, If the bit is set and an ingress  
Ethernet destination address (DA) matches the corresponding Ethernet DA in Table 6-24 then the DA is overwritten  
with a unicast DA. When one or more of the PTPCR2 enable bits is nonzero, a 40-byte packet modification buffer  
and a corresponding fixed 40*8ns=320ns delay are added to the ingress data path.  
For the five IP overwrite enable bits in Table 6-24, if the bit is set and an ingress Ethernet destination address (DA)  
matches the corresponding Ethernet DA in Table 6-24 then the Ethernet DA is overwritten with a unicast DA. In  
addition, if the packet is an IPv4 packet and PKT_CLASS.UDP_IPv4=1 and the ingress packet IPv4 DA  
corresponds with the Ethernet DA as shown in Table 6-24 then the IP DA is also overwritten and the IPv4 header  
checksum is recalculated. Similarly, if the packet is an IPv6 packet and PKT_CLASS.UDP_IPv6=1 and the ingress  
packet IPv6 DA corresponds with the Ethernet DA as shown in Table 6-24 then the IP DA is also overwritten.  
The IETF mapping of IPv4 multicast addresses to Ethernet multicast addresses has 32 possible IPv4 multicast  
addresses mapped to each Ethernet multicast address. Therefore it is possible for a network to have another active  
IPv4 multicast address that maps to one of the Ethernet multicast addresses used for PTP. This situation must be  
avoided. To help detect it, the latched status bit PTP_SR.OVW_ERR is set when PKT_CLASS.UDP_IPv4=1 and  
either the Ethernet or IP address matches an enabled address in Table 6-24 but the other address does not  
correspond. When PKT_CLASS.UDP_IPv6=1, similar checking is done for IPv6 packets.  
All 32 bits of the IPv4 DA are overwritten. For IPv6 only the upper 16 bits and lower 48 bits are overwritten. The  
upper 16 bits are overwritten with 0x0000 to make it a unicast IP address.  
In MAC-in-MAC packets, only the innermost Ethernet DA is checked and overwritten as described above. Enabled  
IP DA overwrites are only done when the innermost Ethernet DA matches and is overwritten. Since this DA  
check/overwrite function would typically be used at network end points after all outer Ethernet frames have been  
removed, this function typically would be enabled in end-points but disabled in aggregation and transport  
equipment where MAC-in-MAC packets may be present.  
60  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
The registers for the first three programmable matching criteria of the Configurable Protocol Classifier (section  
6.13.6.2) are used as the source of the unicast Ethernet and IP addresses used to overwrite multicast addresses  
(see Table 6-25). These three CPC criteria must be disabled for use by the CPC (CFG_OFFSET.ENABLE=0) in  
order to be used instead for this overwrite function.  
When a packet is modified, the Ethernet FCS is also modified to make a valid packet. For PTP-over-IPv4/UDP  
packets, the UDP checksum is always set to zero when any of the five IP overwrite enable bits in Table 6-24 are  
set to 1. For PTPv2-over-IPv6/UDP packets, the two bytes of the UDP payload after the end of the PTP message  
(specified by 1588v2 Annex D for this purpose) are modified to make the UDP checksum correct. See also Notes  
About One-Step/On-the-Fly Corrections in section 6.13.7.  
Table 6-24. Ethernet and IP Multicast Addresses to Check  
Enable Bit  
in PTPCR2  
PTPOE  
P2POE  
PTPOIP  
PTP1OIP  
PTP2OIP  
PTP3OIP  
P2POIP  
Ethernet DA  
IPv4 DA  
IPv6 DA  
Description  
PTP over Ethernet  
PTP Peer-to-Peer over Ethernet  
PTP primary over IP  
PTP alternate-1 over IP  
PTP alternate-2 over IP  
PTP alternate-3 over IP  
PTP Peer-to-Peer over IP  
01-1B-19-00-00-00  
01-1B-C2-00-00-0E  
01-00-5E-00-01-81  
01-00-5E-00-01-82  
01-00-5E-00-01-83  
01-00-5E-00-01-84  
01-00-5E-00-00-6B  
--  
--  
--  
--  
224.0.1.129 FF0X:0:0:0:0:0:0:0181  
224.0.1.130 FF0X:0:0:0:0:0:0:0182  
224.0.1.131 FF0X:0:0:0:0:0:0:0183  
224.0.1.132 FF0X:0:0:0:0:0:0:0184  
224.0.0.107 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:006B  
Table 6-25. Source of Unicast Addresses to Overwrite Multicast  
Bit to Overwrite  
Ethernet DA[15:0]  
Ethernet DA[31:16]  
Ethernet DA[47:32]  
IPv4 DA[15:0]  
IPv4 DA[31:16]  
IPv6 DA[15:0]  
IPv6 DA[31:16]  
IPv6 DA[47:32]  
Source of Bits  
CPC Criterion 1 Mask[15:0]  
CPC Criterion 2 Mask[15:0]  
CPC Criterion 3 Mask[15:0]  
CPC Criterion 1 Match[15:0]  
CPC Criterion 2 Match[15:0]  
CPC Criterion 1 Match[15:0]  
CPC Criterion 2 Match[15:0]  
CPC Criterion 3 Match[15:0]  
6.13.8 Circuit Emulation Timestamping for Adaptive Clock Recovery  
The MAX24288 1588 hardware can be configured to support clock recovery over adaptive mode circuit emulation  
(see IETF RFCs 4553, 5086 and 5087 and Metro Ethernet Forum document MEF 8). Circuit emulation is typically  
used to carry PDH TDM signals such as DS1s and E1s over a packet network. The adaptive mode type of circuit  
emulation is used when a system that recovers TDM signals from the packet network does not have access to a  
high-quality network clock. When this is the case, adaptive clock recovery (ACR) is used to recover the clock of the  
TDM signal from the packets. The MAX24288 provides the necessary hardware to enable ACR.  
To support ACR the MAX24288 can be configured to timestamp each ingress circuit emulation packet and capture  
the sequence number of the packet. In addition, the PEG1 programmable event generator can be configured to  
generate a feedback clock with a frequency equal to the nominal expected packet arrival rate (or an integer  
multiple thereof). This feedback clock is optionally divided down and then timestamped by timestamper TS1. The  
difference between packet timestamps and feedback timestamps can be used as error information analogous to  
the output of a phase-frequency-detector in a PLL. System software and the MAX24288's 1588 time engine  
(section 6.13.1) can be used to complete the PLL loop required to perform ACR. To do this, software implements a  
digital loop filter and any other DSP operations required and steers the frequency of the 1588 time engine, which  
performs the role of the VCO in the PLL.  
Adaptive clock recovery (also known as Timing over Packet mode or TOP mode) is enabled in the MAX24288 by  
setting PTPCR1.TOP_MODE=1. In this mode, PEG1 (see section 6.13.3) is typically configured to generate a  
1.544MHz (DS1) or 2.048MHz (E1) clock. If the PEG1 frequency is a multiple of the nominal expected packet  
61  
 
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
arrival rate, one or both of the TS1 dividers are configured (TS1_DIV1 and TSCR.TS1_DIV2) to divide down the  
feedback clock to the expected rate.  
In TOP mode the packet classifier (section 6.13.6) must be configured to qualify circuit emulation packets. This is  
typically accomplished by using the hardwired packet classifier for transport layer packet headers and the  
configurable packet classifier for the circuit emulation messages. In TOP mode, the offset from the CPC start  
position to the start of the sequence number (in the circuit emulation control word) must be specified in the  
PTP_OFFSET register. PTP_OFFSET is configured by writing the offset to the CFG_OFFSET register and then  
writing the CFG_WR register with CFG_SEL=1111 and WR=1.  
To convey the packet and PEG1 feedback timestamps to system software, the timestamps can be put into the TS3  
and TS1 FIFOs, respectively, or they can be inserted into the ingress packet on-the-fly.  
Writing Timestamps to FIFOs. The ingress packet timestamp and sequence number are written into the TS3  
FIFO when TSCR.TS3SRC_SEL=0. The PEG1 feedback timestamp is written into the TS1 FIFO when  
TSCR.TS1SRC_SEL=0. By default every ingress timestamp is written to the TS3 FIFO. However, when  
PTPCR1.TS3_FIFO=1, only one entry can be written to the TS3 (ingress) FIFO after each timestamp is written to  
the TS1 (PEG1 feedback) FIFO. This reduces the number of FIFO entries that system software must process.  
Writing Timestamps to the Ingress Packet. When TS_INSERT_EN.TOP_EN=1 and TS_INSERT.  
NSEC_ENA=1, the ingress packet timestamp and the most recent PEG1 feedback timestamp are written into each  
qualified TOP ingress packet on-the-fly. The data is written into the packet at the byte offset specified by  
TS_INSERT.NSEC_OFF. In total, 10 bytes are written into the packet: 4 bytes of packet timestamp nanoseconds,  
then 4 bytes of PEG1 feedback timestamp nanoseconds then a two-byte field to make the UDP checksum correct  
in IPv6/UDP packets. Each field is written most-significant byte first.  
6.14 Data Path Latencies  
The MAX24288 data path latencies are shown in Table 6-26 below. These latencies exceed the full-duplex delay  
constraints in 802.3 Table 36-9b. Therefore MAX24288 may not be compatible with PAUSE operation as specified  
in 802.3 Clause 31.  
Table 6-26. GMII Data Path Latencies  
Without Packet  
Modification  
Buffer  
W/ 40-Byte Packet  
Modification  
Buffer  
802.3 Max,  
ns (#bit times)  
Event  
Min, ns Max, ns Min, ns Max, ns  
TX_EN=1 sampled to 1st bit of /S/ on TDP/TDN  
119  
211  
121  
216  
431  
531  
433  
536  
108.8 (136)  
153.6 (192)  
1st bit of /T/ on RDP/RDN to RX_DV deassert  
6.15 Power Supply Considerations  
Due to the multi-power-supply nature of the device, some I/Os have parasitic diodes between a 1.2V supply and a  
3.3V supply. When ramping power supplies up or down, care must be taken to avoid forward-biasing these diodes  
because it could cause latchup. Two methods are available to prevent this. The first method is to place a Schottky  
diode external to the device between the 1.2V supply and the 3.3V supply to force the 3.3V supply to be within one  
parasitic diode drop of the 1.2V supply. The second method is to ramp up the 3.3V supply first and then ramp up  
the 1.2V supply.  
62  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
6.16 Startup Procedure  
MAX24288 requires the following start-up procedure after power-up for proper operation:  
1. Assert RST_N (low) for at least 100s after the power supplies have ramped up and are stable then  
deassert RST_N.  
2. Write 0x0012 to the PAGESEL register. This disables the SPI interface and selects MDIO page 2.  
3. Set the PTPCR1.RX_PWDN bit to power-down the receive CDR.  
4. Wait 1ms.  
5. Clear the PTPCR1.RX_PWDN bit.  
6. Set the BMCR.DP_RST bit to reset the datapath. This bit is self-clearing.  
The device can then be further configured as needed.  
63  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7. Register Descriptions  
The PHY registers (Table 7-1) can be accessed only through the MDIO interface, which is part of the parallel MII  
interface. The IEEE1588 registers (Table 7-2) can be accessed either through the MDIO interface or through the  
SPI interface, depending on the setting of the PAGESEL.SPI_DIS register bit. When the SPI interface is enabled,  
the MDIO interface can access only the Table 7-1 registers, the SPI interface can access only the Table 7-2  
registers, and accesses over these interfaces to these register spaces can be simultaneous. When the SPI  
interface is disabled, All registers are accessed through the MDIO interface.  
Through the MDIO interface, registers at addresses 16 to 30 are paged using the PAGESEL.PAGE register field to  
allow register map expansion to more than 32 registers. MDIO register addresses 0 to 15 and 31 are not paged  
and remain the same regardless of the value of PAGESEL.PAGE. Through the SPI interface, all 1588 registers can  
be accessed at the SPI addresses shown in Table 7-2. Nonexistent registers are not writable and read back as  
high impedance through the MDIO port and 0x0000 through the SPI port.  
7.1  
Register Map  
Table 7-1. PHY Register Map (MDIO Only)  
MDIO  
Register  
Address  
0
Register Name  
R/W  
BMCR  
BMSR  
ID1  
ID2  
AN_ADV  
AN_RX  
AN_EXP  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
RW  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RW  
RO  
RO  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
--  
--  
--  
15  
EXT_STAT  
JIT_DIAG  
PCSCR  
GMIICR  
CR  
IR  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
RO  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
RW  
P0.16  
P0.17  
P0.18  
P0.19  
P0.20  
P0.21  
P0.22  
P0.23  
P0.24  
P0.25  
P0.26  
P0.27  
P0.28  
P0.29  
P0.30  
31  
PAGESEL  
64  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Table 7-2. 1588 Register Map (MDIO or SPI)  
Address  
MDIO SPI  
Register Name  
R/W  
P1.16  
P1.17  
P1.18  
P1.19  
P1.20  
P1.21  
P1.22  
P1.23  
P1.24  
P1.25  
P1.26  
P1.27  
P1.28  
P1.29  
P1.30  
---  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ID  
RO  
RW  
RW  
RO  
RO  
RW  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
--  
GPIOCR1  
GPIOCR2  
GPIOSR  
PTP_IR  
PTP_IE  
PTP_SR  
HDR_DAT1  
HDR_DAT2  
TEIO1  
10 TEIO2  
11 TEIO3  
12 TEIO4  
13 TEIO5  
14 TERW  
15 --  
P2.16  
P2.17  
P2.18  
P2.19  
P2.20  
P2.21  
P2.22  
P2.23  
P2.24  
P2.25  
P2.26  
P2.27  
P2.28  
P2.29  
P2.30  
---  
16 PTPCR1  
17 PTPCR2  
18 TSCR  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
--  
19 PEGCR  
20 TS1_DIV  
21 TS_FIFO_EN  
22 TS_INSERT_EN  
23 TS_INSERT  
24 CF_INGRESS  
25 CF_EGRESS  
26 PTPCR3  
27 --  
28 UID_CHK  
29 --  
30 --  
RW  
--  
--  
31 --  
--  
P3.16  
P3.17  
P3.18  
P3.19  
P3.20  
P3.21  
P3.22  
P3.23  
P3.24  
P3.25  
P3.26  
P3.27  
P3.28  
P3.29  
P3.30  
---  
32 PKT_CLASS  
33 VLAN2_ID  
34 --  
RW  
RW  
--  
35 --  
--  
36 MEF_ECID_HI  
37 MEF_ECID_LO  
38 MPLS_LABEL_HI  
39 MPLS_LABEL_LO  
40 ETYPE_ALT  
41 UDP_SRC  
42 UDP_DST  
43 CFG_MASK  
44 CFG_MATCH  
45 CFG_OFFSET  
46 CFG_WR  
47 PHY_MATCH  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
65  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2  
Direct Access Registers  
The register operating type is described in the “R/W” column using the following codes:  
Type  
Description  
RW  
RO  
SC  
Read-Write. Register field can be written and read back.  
Read Only. Register field can only be read; writing it has no effect. Write 0 for future compatibility.  
Self Clearing. Register bit self clears to 0 after being written as 1  
LH-E Latch HighEvent. Bit latches high when the internal event occurs and returns low when it is read.  
LL-E Latch LowEvent. Bit latches low when the internal event occurs and returns high when it is read.  
LH-C Latch HighCondition. Bit latches high when the internal condition is present. If the condition is still  
present when the bit is read then the bit stays high. If the condition is not present when the bit is read  
then the bit returns low.  
LL-C  
Latch LowCondition. Bit latches low when the internal condition is present. If the condition is still  
present when the bit is read then the bit stays low. If the condition is not present when the bit is read  
then the bit returns high.  
In the register definitions below, the register addresses (MDIO and SPI) are provided at the end of the table title.  
Addresses 16 to 30 are bank-switched by the PAGESEL.PAGE field as shown in Table 7-1. Addresses 0 to 15 and  
31 are not bank-switched. The SPI register space is mapped to the MDIO register space using this formula; SPI  
address = (MDIO page 1) * 16 + MDIO address 16. For example an MDIO register mapped to page 2 address  
17 would have the address (MDIO 2.17, SPI 17).  
7.2.1 BMCR  
Basic Mode Control Register (MDIO 0)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
DP_RST  
DLB  
Datapath Reset. This bit resets the entire datapath  
from parallel MII through PCS. Self-clearing. See  
section 6.3.1.  
0 = normal operation  
1 = reset  
Diagnostic Loopback. Transmit data is looped  
back to the receive path. See block diagram in  
Figure 2-1 for the location of this loopback and see  
section 6.11 for additional details.  
0 = Disable diagnostic loopback (normal operation)  
1 = Enable diagnostic loopback  
Ignore on Read  
RW,  
SC  
0
14  
RW  
0
13  
12  
Reserved  
AN_EN  
RO  
RW  
0
Auto-negotiation enable. See section 6.8.  
0 = Disable  
Note 1  
1 = Enable  
11:10 Reserved  
Ignore on Read  
RO  
0
0
9
AN_START  
Setting this bit causes a restart of the Auto-  
negotiation process. Self clears. See section 6.8.  
Ignore on Read  
RW,  
SC  
RO  
8
7
Reserved  
0
0
COL_TEST  
Collision test. When this bit is set, MAX24288  
asserts the COL signal within 64 parallel interface  
transmit clock cycles after TX_EN is asserted and  
deasserts the COL signal within one parallel  
interface transmit clock cycle after TX_EN is  
deasserted. See 802.3 section 22.2.4.1.9. See  
section 6.11.1.  
RW  
6:0  
Reserved  
Ignore on Read  
RO  
0
Note 1: At reset when COL=1 or AN_EN is set to 1 else it is set to 0.  
66  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.2 BMSR  
Basic Mode Status Register (MDIO 1)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
14  
Reserved  
Ignore on read  
100BASE-X Full Duplex capability.  
Always indicates 1 = able to do 100BASE-X full duplex  
100BASE-X Half Duplex capability  
Always indicates 1 = able to do 100BASE-X half duplex  
10Mb/s Full Duplex capability  
Always indicates 1 = able to do 10Mb/s full duplex  
RO  
RO  
0
1
SPD100FD  
SPD100HD  
SPD10FD  
SPD10HD  
13  
12  
11  
RO  
RO  
RO  
1
1
1
10Mb/s Half Duplex capability  
Always indicates 1 = able to do 10Mb/s half duplex  
Ignore on read  
Extended Status information available  
10:9  
8
Reserved  
EXT_STAT  
RO  
RO  
0
1
Always indicates 1 = extended status information in  
EXT_STAT register  
7
6
Reserved  
MF_PRE  
Ignore on Read  
RO  
RO  
0
1
Management preamble suppression supported  
Always indicates 1 = MDIO preamble suppression is  
supported.  
5
4
AN_COMP  
RFAULT  
Auto-negotiation Complete  
0 = Auto-negotiation not completed or not in progress  
1 = Auto-negotiation has completed  
RO  
0
0
Remote Fault Indicates presence of remote fault on link  
partner. For SGMII, remote fault is latched high when the  
ALOS input pin goes high or when the CDR indicates  
receive loss-of-lock. For 1000BASE-X, remote fault is  
RF¹00 in AN_RX. RFAULT is latched high when a remote  
fault is detected. If no remote fault is detected when  
RFAULT is read then RFAULT goes low. Otherwise  
RFAULT remains unchanged. IR.RFAULT is a read-only  
copy of this bit that can cause an interrupt when enabled.  
0 = no remote fault has been detected since this bit was  
last read  
RO,  
LH-C  
1 = remote fault has occurred since this bit was last read  
3
2
AN_ABIL  
LINK_ST  
Auto-negotiation Ability  
RO  
1
0
Always indicates 1 = able to perform Auto-negotiation  
Link Status Indicates the status of the physical  
connection to the link partner. LINK_ST is latched low  
when the link goes down. If the PCS state machine is in  
the link-up state when LINK_ST is read then LINK_ST  
goes high. Otherwise LINK_ST remains unchanged.  
IR.LINK_ST is a read-only copy of this bit that can cause  
an interrupt when enabled.  
RO,  
LL-C  
0 = link down has occurred since this bit was last read  
1 = link has been up continuously since this bit was last  
read  
1
0
Reserved  
EXT_CAP  
Ignore on Read  
Extended Register Capability  
RO  
RO  
0
1
Always indicates 1 = the extended registers exist  
67  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.3 ID1 and ID2  
Registers ID1 and ID2 are set to all zeroes as allowed by clause 22.2.4.3.1 of IEEE 802.3. The actual device ID  
can be read from the ID register.  
Device ID 1 Register (MDIO 2)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:0 OUI_HI  
OUI[3:18]  
RO  
0
Device ID 2 Register (MDIO 3)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:10 OUI_LI  
OUI[19:24]  
RO  
RO  
RO  
0
0
0
9:4  
3:0  
MODEL  
REV  
MODEL[5:0] Model Number  
REV[3:0] Revision Number  
68  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.4 AN_ADV  
The register contents are transmitted to the link partners AN_RX register.  
The fields of this register have different functions depending on whether the device is in 1000BASE-X auto-  
negotiation mode or in SGMII control information transfer mode. See section 6.8 for details.  
Auto-Negotiation Advertisement Register (MDIO 4)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
See section 6.8 for details.  
Ignore on read  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
14  
13:0  
AN_ADV[15] (NP_LK)  
AN_ADV[14]  
AN_ADV[13:0]  
RW  
RO  
RW  
Note 1  
0
Note 1  
See section 6.8 for details.  
Note 1: The reset value of the bits of this register depend on the values of configuration pins at reset, as shown below. See section 6.1.  
Configuration Pin Settings at Reset  
COL=0, RX_DV=0  
Configuration Description  
No auto-negotiation  
AN_ADV[15:0] Reset Value  
0000 0000 0000 0000  
COL=0, RX_DV=1, RXD[1]=0  
COL=0, RX_DV=1, RXD[1]=1, GPO2=0 15-pin config mode, SGMII 1000Mbps  
COL=0, RX_DV=1, RXD[1]=1, GPO2=1 15-pin config mode, 1000BASE-X  
15-pin config mode, SGMII 10 or 100Mbps  
1001 0R00 0000 0001 (R = RXD[0] pin value)  
1001 1000 0000 0001  
0000 0000 0010 0000  
COL=1, GPO2=0  
COL=1, GPO2=1  
3-pin config mode, SGMII 1000Mbps  
3-pin config mode, 1000BASE-X  
1001 1000 0000 0001  
0000 0000 0010 0000  
7.2.5 AN_RX  
The rx_Config_Reg[15:0] value received from the link partner is stored in this register.  
This fields of this register have different functions depending on whether the device is in 1000BASE-X auto-  
negotiation mode or in SGMII control information transfer mode. See section 6.8 for details.  
Auto-Negotiation Link Partner Ability Receive Register (MDIO 5)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
See section 6.8 for details  
1= link partner successfully received the transmitted base  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
14  
NP  
RO  
RO  
0
0
Acknowledge  
page.  
13:0  
ABILITY  
See section 6.8 for details  
RO  
0
7.2.6 AN_EXP  
This register is used to indicate that a new link partner abilities page has been received.  
Auto-negotiation Extended Status Register (MDIO 6)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Reserved  
NP  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:3  
2
Ignore on Read  
RO  
RO  
0
0
Next Page capability - This device does not support next  
pages, it always reads as 0.  
1
0
PAGE  
Page received, clears when read. See section 6.8.  
0 = No new AN_RX page from link partner  
1 = New AN_RX page from Link partner is ready  
Ignore on Read  
RO,  
LH-E  
0
0
Reserved  
RO  
69  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.7 EXT_STAT  
Extended Status Register (MDIO 15)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
1000X_FDX  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
1000BASE-X Full Duplex capability.  
RO  
1
Always indicates 1 = able to do 100BASE-X full duplex  
14  
1000X_HDX  
Reserved  
1000BASE-X Half Duplex capability.  
Always indicates 0 = not able to do 100BASE-X half duplex  
RO  
RO  
0
0
13:0  
Ignore on Read  
7.2.8 JIT_DIAG  
Jitter Diagnostics Register (MDIO 0.16)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
JIT_EN  
Jitter Pattern Enable.  
RW  
0
Enables jitter pattern to be transmitted instead of normal  
data on TDP/TDN.  
0 = Transmit normal data patterns from PCS encoder  
1 = Transmit jitter test pattern specified by JIT_PAT  
Jitter Pattern. Specifies the pattern to transmit. Includes  
standard patterns specified in IEEE 802.3 Annex 36A.  
14:12 JIT_PAT  
RW  
0
JIT_PAT Pattern  
000  
001  
Custom pattern defined in CUST_PAT[9:0]  
802.3 Annex 36A.1 high frequency test pattern  
1010101010…  
010  
802.3 Annex 36A.3 mixed frequency test  
pattern  
1111101011 0000010100…  
011  
100  
Low frequency pattern  
1111100000…  
"Random" jitter pattern  
0011111010 1001001100 1010011100  
1100010101…  
101  
802.3 Annex 36A.2 low frequency test pattern  
1111100000…  
110  
111  
Reserved  
Reserved  
.
11:10 Reserved  
9:0 CUST_PAT  
Write as 0, Ignore on Read  
CUST_PAT[9:0] Custom 10-bit repeating pattern used when  
JIT_PAT=000. The transmission order is LSB(0) to MSB(9).  
RO  
RW  
0
0
70  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.9 PCSCR  
PCS Control Register (MDIO 0.17)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
14  
Reserved  
TIM_SHRT  
Ignore on read  
RO  
RW  
0
0
When PCSCR.BASEX=1 (1000BASE-X mode), this bit can  
be used to shorten the link timer timeout from 10ms to  
1.6ms. The normal 10ms setting is called for in the 802.3  
standard. When BASEX=0 this bit is ignored.  
0 = PCS link timer has normal timeout  
1 = PCS link timer has 1.6ms timeout  
13  
12  
DYRX_DIS  
DYTX_DIS  
Disable Receive PCS Running Disparity.  
0 = Enable PCS receive running disparity (normal)  
1 = Disable PCS receive running disparity  
Disable Transmit PCS Running Disparity.  
0 = Enable PCS transmit running disparity (normal)  
1 = Disable PCS transmit running disparity  
Write as 0, Ignore on Read  
Disable auto-negotiation watchdog timer. See section 6.8.  
0 = Restart auto-negotiation after 5 seconds if link not up  
after previous start or restart  
RW  
RW  
0
0
11:7  
6
Reserved  
WD_DIS  
RO  
RW  
0
0
1 = Disable auto-negotiation watchdog restart  
5
4
Reserved  
BASEX  
Ignore on Read  
Specifies 1000BASE-X PCS mode or SGMII PCS mode. See  
section 6.8.  
RO  
RW  
0
Note 1  
0 = SGMII PCS mode selected, link timer = 1.6 ms  
1 = 1000BASE-X PCS mode selected, link timer = 10 ms  
(or 1.6ms when PCSCR.TIM_SHRT=1)  
3:2  
1
Reserved  
TLB  
Write as 0, Ignore on Read  
RO  
RW  
0
0
Terminal Loopback. Transmit data is looped back to the  
receive path at the high-speed serial interface (TDP/TDN to  
RDP/RDN). See block diagram in Figure 2-1 for the location  
of this loopback and see section 6.11 for additional details.  
0 = Disable terminal loopback (normal operation)  
1 = Enable terminal loopback  
0
Reserved  
Write as 1, Ignore on Read  
RW  
1
Note 1: At reset, if COL=1 or RXD[1] = 1 then BASEX is set to the value of the GPO2 pin, else BASEX is set to 0. In other words, in 3-pin  
configuration mode OR (15-pin configuration mode AND parallel interface is set to 1000Mbps) BASEX is set to the value of the GPO2  
pin. Otherwise BASEX is set to 0.  
71  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.10 GMIICR  
GMII Interface Control Register (MDIO 0.18)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:14 SPD[1:0]  
Selects parallel MII interface mode. See section 6.7.  
RW  
Note 1  
Bus mode  
SPD  
00  
01  
10  
11  
Speed  
10 Mbps  
100 Mbps  
1000 Mbps  
1000 Mbps  
DDR=0  
MII  
MII  
DDR=1  
RGMII-10  
RGMII-100  
RGMII-1000  
GMII  
reserved  
13  
12  
Reserved  
DTE_DCE  
Write as 0, ignore on Read  
RO  
RW  
0
DTE-DCE mode selection for MII bus mode. Used when  
SPD[1:0]=0x and DDR=0; ignored otherwise. See section  
6.7.3.  
Note 2  
1 = MII-DTE (MAX24288 on MAC side of MII, both RXCLK  
and TXCLK are inputs)  
0 = MII-DCE (MAX24288 on PHY side of MII, both RXCLK  
and TXCLK are outputs)  
11  
10  
DDR  
Reduced pin count (RGMII) using double data rate, i.e. data  
sampling/updating on both edges of the clock. See the  
SPD[1:0] description above and section 6.7.  
0 = MII or GMII bus mode  
RW  
RW  
Note 3  
Note 4  
1 = RGMII bus mode  
TXCLK_EN  
In GMII and RGMII modes, the TXCLK pin is not used for  
parallel interface operation. The TXCLK_EN bit enables  
TXCLK to output a 125MHz clock from the TX PLL in those  
modes. TXCLK_EN is ignored in MII mode. See section 6.7.  
0 = TXCLK pin is high impedance  
1 = TXCLK pin outputs 125MHz clock  
9:8  
7
Reserved  
Reserved  
Write as 0, ignore on Read  
Write as 1, ignore on Read  
RO  
RW  
0
1
6:4  
3
Reserved  
REF_INV  
Write as 0, ignore on Read  
REFCLK Invert control.  
RO  
RW  
0
0
0 = Noninverted  
1 = Inverted  
2:1  
0
Reserved  
RLB  
Write as 0, ignore on Read  
RO  
RW  
0
0
Remote Loopback. Receive data is looped back to the  
transmit path. See block diagram in Figure 2-1 for the  
location of this loopback and see section 6.11 for additional  
details.  
0 = Disable remote loopback (normal operation)  
1 = Enable remote loopback  
Note 1: At reset if COL=0 then SPD[1:0] is set to the value on the RXD[1:0] pins, else SPD[1:0] is set to 10. In other words, in 15-pin  
configuration mode SPD[1:0] is set to the value on the RXD[1:0] pins. In 3-pin configuration mode SPD[1:0] is set to 10 (1000Mbps).  
Note 2: At reset if COL=0 and RXD[1] = 0 the DTE_DCE bit is set to the value on the GPO2 pin, else DTE_DCE is set to 0. In other words, in  
15-pin configuration mode when the parallel interface is configured for 10Mbps or 100Mbps the DTE_DCE bit is set to the value on  
the GPO2 pin. Otherwise the DTE_DCE bit is set to 0.  
Note 3: At reset the DDR bit is set to the value on the CRS pin.  
Note 4: At reset if COL=0 the TXCLK_EN bit is set to the value on the TXCLK pin, else TXCLK_EN is set to 1. In other words, in 15-pin  
configuration mode the TXCLK_EN bit is set to the value on the TXCLK pin. In 3-pin configuration mode TXCLK_EN is set to 1.  
72  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.11 CR  
Control Register (MDIO 0.19)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:13  
Reserved  
Write as 0, Ignore on Read  
RO  
0
12  
11  
10  
9
DLBDO  
RLBDO  
TLBDO  
RCFREQ  
Diagnostic Loopback Data Out. Set this bit to enable transmit data to  
be output on the serial interface during diagnostic loopback (i.e.  
when BMCR.DLB=1). See section 6.11.  
Remote Loopback Data Out. Set this bit to enable receive data to be  
output on the parallel interface during remote loopback (i.e. when  
GMIICR.RLB=1). See section 6.11.  
Terminal Loopback Data Out. Set this bit to enable transmit data  
(rather than zeros) to be output on the serial interface during  
terminal loopback (i.e. when PCSCR.TLB=1). See section 6.11.  
Specifies which recovered clock frequency to output on a GPIO pin.  
See section 6.2.  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
0
0
0
0
0 = 25MHz  
1 = 125MHz  
8
RCSQL  
Set this bit to squelch the recovered clock on GPO2, GPIO2 and  
GPIO4-7 when any of several squelch conditions occur. See  
sections 6.2.1.  
RW  
0
0 = Recovered clock output not squelched  
1 = Recovered clock squelched when a squelch condition occurs  
7:6  
5
Reserved  
TCLK_EN  
Write as 0, Ignore on Read  
RO  
RW  
0
0
Serial interface transmit clock output enable. See section 6.6.  
0 = Disable TCLKP/TCLKN  
1 = Enable TCLKP/TCLKN  
4:0  
Reserved  
Write as 0, Ignore on Read  
RO  
0
73  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.12 IR  
This register contains both latched status bits and interrupt enable bits. When the latched status bit is active and  
the associated interrupt enable bit is set an interrupt signal can be driven onto one of the GPIO pins by configuring  
the GPIOCR1 register.  
Interrupt Register 1 (MDIO 0.20)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Reserved  
Description  
Write as 0, Ignore on Read  
R/W  
Reset  
15:14  
RO  
0
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
RFAULT_IE  
LINK_ST_IE  
ALOS_IE  
Interrupt Enable for RFAULT.  
0 = interrupt disabled  
1 = interrupt enabled  
Interrupt Enable for LINK_ST.  
0 = interrupt disabled  
1 = interrupt enabled  
Interrupt Enable for ALOS. See section 6.6.  
0 = interrupt disabled  
1 = interrupt enabled  
Interrupt Enable for PAGE. See section 6.8.  
0 = interrupt disabled  
1 = interrupt enabled  
Interrupt Enable for RLOL. See section 6.6.  
0 = interrupt disabled  
1 = interrupt enabled  
Interrupt Enable for RLOS. See section 6.6.  
0 = interrupt disabled  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
0
0
0
0
0
0
PAGE _IE  
RLOL_IE  
8
RLOS_IE  
1 = interrupt enabled  
7:6  
5
Reserved  
RFAULT  
Write as 0, Ignore on Read  
RO  
RO  
0
0
Remote Fault. This is a read-only copy of BMSR.RFAULT.  
An interrupt is generated when RFAULT=1 and  
RFAULT_IE=1.  
4
3
LINK_ST  
ALOS  
Link Status. This is a read-only copy of BMSR.LINK_ST  
(active low). An interrupt is generated when LINK_ST=0  
and LINK_ST_IE=1.  
Analog Loss-of-Signal latched status bit. Set when ALOS  
input pin goes high. An interrupt is generated when  
ALOS=1 and ALOS_IE=1. See section 6.6.  
0 = Defect not detected since last read  
RO  
0
0
RO,  
LH-C  
1 = Defect detected since last read  
2
1
0
PAGE  
RLOL  
RLOS  
This is a read-only copy of AN_EXP.PAGE. An interrupt is  
generated when PAGE=1 and PAGE_IE=1. See section  
6.8.  
0 = Defect not detected since last read  
1 = Defect detected since last read  
Receive CDR Loss-of-Lock latched status bit. Set when  
the CDR PLL loses lock. An interrupt is generated when  
RLOL=1 and RLOL_IE=1. See section 6.10.1.  
0 = Defect not detected since last read  
RO  
0
0
0
RO,  
LH-C  
1 = Defect detected since last read  
Receive CDR Loss-of-Signal latched status bit. Set when  
the CDR block sees no transitions in the incoming signal  
for 24 consecutive bit times. See section 6.6.  
0 = Defect not detected since last read  
RO,  
LH-C  
1 = Defect detected since last read  
74  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.13 PAGESEL  
This page select register is used to extend the MDIO register space by mapping 1 of 4 pages of 15 registers into  
the MDIO register addresses 16 to 30. PAGESEL also has configuration bits that set the SPI bus timing modes. It  
also has global interrupt source status bits. This register is available on all pages at MDIO register address 31. This  
register is not available through the SPI interface.  
Page Register (MDIO 31, on all pages)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
TEST  
Description  
Factory Test. Always write 0.  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
RW  
0
14  
13  
PTP_IR  
Interrupt from PTP_IR register status, set if any latched status  
and its associated enable bit are both active. See section 6.3.3.  
0 = interrupt source not active  
RO  
RO  
0
0
1 = interrupt source is active  
IR  
Interrupt from IR register. This bit is set if any latched status bit  
and its associated interrupt enable bit are both active in the IR  
register. See section 6.3.3.  
0 = interrupt source not active  
1 = interrupt source is active  
12:8  
7
Reserved  
SPISWAP  
Ignore on Read  
SPI address and data transmit/receive bit order. See section  
6.4.  
RO  
RW  
0
0
0 = Most significant bit first  
1 = Least significant bit first  
6
5
4
CPHA  
SPI data phase select. See section 6.4.  
RW  
RW  
RW  
0
0
0
CPOL  
SPI polarity select. See section 6.4.  
SPI_DIS  
SPI interface disable. See section 6.4.  
0 = Enable SPI. Maps the IEEE1588 registers to SPI.  
1 = Disable SPI. Maps the IEEE1588 registers to MDIO.  
Ignore on Read  
3:2  
1:0  
Reserved  
RO  
RW  
0
PAGE[1:0]  
Page selection for MDIO register addresses 16 to 30. See  
section 7.  
00  
00 = PHY extended register page 0  
01 = 1588 extended register page 1  
10 = 1588 extended register page 2  
11 = 1588 extended register page 3  
75  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.14 ID  
The ID register matches the JTAG device ID (lower 12 bits) and revision (all 4 bits).  
Device ID Register (MDIO 1.16, SPI 0)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:12  
REV  
DEVICE  
REV[3:0] Device revision number. Contact factory for value.  
RO  
Note 1  
11:0  
DEVICE[11:0] Device ID  
RO  
Note 1  
Note 1: See Device Code in Table 8-2.  
7.2.15 GPIOCR1  
GPIO Control Register 1 (MDIO 1.17, SPI 1)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
RST  
Global device reset. Pin states are sampled and used to set  
the default values of several register fields. See section 6.3.1.  
0 = normal operation  
RW,  
SC  
0
1 = reset  
14:12 GPO1_SEL[2:0]  
GPO1 output pin mode selection. See Table 6-4.  
GPO2 output pin mode selection. See Table 6-5.  
GPIO1 output pin mode selection. See Table 6-4.  
GPIO2 output pin mode selection. See Table 6-5.  
GPIO3 output pin mode selection. See Table 6-4.  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
110  
110  
Note 1  
000  
11:9  
8:6  
5:3  
2:0  
GPO2_SEL[2:0]  
GPIO1_SEL[2:0]  
GPIO2_SEL[2:0]  
GPIO3_SEL[2:0]  
000  
Note 1: At reset if COL=0 and GPO1=1 the GPIO1_SEL bits are set to 100 (125MHz), else the bits are set to 000 (high impedance).  
7.2.16 GPIOCR2  
GPIO Control Register 2 (MDIO 1.18, SPI 2)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:14 Reserved  
Ignore on Read  
RO  
RW  
0
0
13  
12  
GPIO47_LSC  
GPIO4-7 Latched Status Control. This bit controls the  
behavior of latched status bits GPIO4L through GPIO7L in  
GPIOSR. See section 6.2.  
0 = Set latched status bit when input goes low  
1 = Set latched status bit when input goes high  
GPIO1-3 Latched Status Control. This bit controls the  
behavior of latched status bits GPIO1L through GPIO3L in  
GPIOSR. See section 6.2.  
GPIO13_LSC  
RW  
0
0 = Set latched status bit when input goes low  
1 = Set latched status bit when input goes high  
GPIO7 output pin mode selection. See Table 6-6.  
GPIO6 output pin mode selection. See Table 6-6.  
GPIO5 output pin mode selection. See Table 6-6.  
GPIO4 output pin mode selection. See Table 6-6.  
11:9  
8:6  
5:3  
GPIO7_SEL[2:0]  
GPIO6_SEL[2:0]  
GPIO5_SEL[2:0]  
GPIO4_SEL[2:0]  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
000  
000  
000  
000  
2:0  
76  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.17 GPIOSR  
GPIO Status Register (MDIO 1.19, SPI 3)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
14  
Reserved  
Ignore on Read  
RO  
RO,  
LH-E  
0
0
GPIO7L  
GPIO6L  
GPIO5L  
GPIO4L  
GPIO3L  
GPIO2L  
GPIO1L  
GPIO7 latched status.. Set when the transition specified by  
GPIOCR2.GPIO47_LSC occurs on the GPIO7 pin.  
0 = Transition did not occur since this bit was last read  
1 = Transition did occur since this bit was last read  
GPIO6 latched status.. Set when the transition specified by  
GPIOCR2.GPIO47_LSC occurs on the GPIO6 pin.  
0 = Transition did not occur since this bit was last read  
1 = Transition did occur since this bit was last read  
GPIO5 latched status.. Set when the transition specified by  
GPIOCR2.GPIO47_LSC occurs on the GPIO5 pin.  
0 = Transition did not occur since this bit was last read  
1 = Transition did occur since this bit was last read  
GPIO4 latched status.. Set when the transition specified by  
GPIOCR2.GPIO47_LSC occurs on the GPIO4 pin.  
0 = Transition did not occur since this bit was last read  
1 = Transition did occur since this bit was last read  
GPIO3 latched status.. Set when the transition specified by  
GPIOCR2.GPIO13_LSC occurs on the GPIO3 pin.  
0 = Transition did not occur since this bit was last read  
1 = Transition did occur since this bit was last read  
GPIO2 latched status.. Set when the transition specified by  
GPIOCR2.GPIO13_LSC occurs on the GPIO2 pin.  
0 = Transition did not occur since this bit was last read  
1 = Transition did occur since this bit was last read  
GPIO1 latched status.. Set when the transition specified by  
GPIOCR2.GPIO13_LSC occurs on the GPIO1 pin.  
0 = Transition did not occur since this bit was last read  
1 = Transition did occur since this bit was last read  
Ignore on Read  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
RO,  
LH-E  
0
0
0
0
0
0
RO,  
LH-E  
RO,  
LH-E  
RO,  
LH-E  
RO,  
LH-E  
8
RO,  
LH-E  
7
6
Reserved  
GPIO7  
RO  
RO  
0
0
GPIO7 pin real time status. See section 6.2.  
0 = Pin low  
1 = Pin high  
5
4
3
2
1
0
GPIO6  
GPIO5  
GPIO4  
GPIO3  
GPIO2  
GPIO1  
GPIO6 pin real time status.  
0 = Pin low  
1 = Pin high  
GPIO5 pin real time status.  
0 = Pin low  
1 = Pin high  
GPIO4 pin real time status.  
0 = Pin low  
1 = Pin high  
GPIO3 pin real time status.  
0 = Pin low  
1 = Pin high  
GPIO2 pin real time status.  
0 = Pin low  
1 = Pin high  
GPIO1 pin real time status.  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
RO  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 = Pin low  
1 = Pin high  
77  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.18 PTP_IR  
When the latched status bit is set and the associated interrupt enable bit in PTP_IE is set an interrupt signal can be  
driven onto one of the GPIO pins by configuring the GPIOCR1 register.  
PTP Interrupt Register (MDIO Page 1.20, SPI 4)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
IR  
Interrupt from IR register. Set if any latched status and its  
associated enable bit are both set. See section 6.3.3.  
0 = interrupt source not active  
RO  
0
1 = interrupt source is active  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
PTP_IR  
TS3_OF  
TS3_NE  
TS2_OF  
TS2_NE  
TS1_OF  
TS1_NE  
Interrupt from this register. Set if any latched status and its  
associated enable bit are both set. See section 6.3.3.  
0 = interrupt source not active  
1 = interrupt source is active  
Timestamp 3 FIFO Overflow. Set when FIFO overflows. See  
sections 6.13.4 and 6.13.6.3.  
RO  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RO,  
LH-E  
0 = No overflow occurred since last read  
1 = Overflow occurred  
Timestamp 3 FIFO Not Empty. Set when FIFO goes from  
empty to not empty. See sections 6.13.4 and 6.13.6.3.  
0 = No transition occurred since last read  
1 = Empty-to-not-empty transition occurred  
Timestamp 2 FIFO Overflow. Set when FIFO overflows. See  
sections 6.13.4 and 6.13.6.3.  
RO,  
LH-E  
RO,  
LH-E  
0 = No overflow occurred since last read  
1 = Overflow occurred  
Timestamp 2 FIFO Not Empty. Set when FIFO goes from  
empty to not empty. See sections 6.13.4 and 6.13.6.3.  
0 = No transition occurred since last read  
1 = Empty-to-not-empty transition occurred  
Timestamp 1 FIFO Overflow. Set when FIFO overflows. See  
sections 6.13.4 and 6.13.6.3.  
RO,  
LH-E  
RO,  
LH-E  
0 = No overflow occurred since last read  
1 = Overflow occurred  
8
Timestamp 1 FIFO Not Empty. Set when FIFO goes from  
empty to not empty. See sections 6.13.4 and 6.13.6.3.  
0 = No transition occurred since last read  
1 = Empty-to-not-empty transition occurred  
Ignore on Read  
PEG2 FIFO not full. See section 6.13.3.  
0 = No transition occurred since last read  
1 = Full-to-not-full transition occurred  
RO,  
LH-E  
7
6
Reserved  
P2FNF  
RO  
RO,  
LH-E  
0
0
5
4
P2SC  
P2EC  
PEG2 Sequence Complete. Set when a repeat sequence in  
the PEG2 controller is complete. See section 6.13.3.  
0 = No repeat sequence completed since last read  
1 = Repeat sequence completed since last read  
RO,  
LH-E  
0
0
PEG2 Event Complete. Set when a PEG2 event that is  
marked for status latching (PEG command FIFO bit 21=1)  
completes. See section 6.13.3.  
RO,  
LH-E  
0 = No marked event completed since last read  
1 = Marked event completed since last read  
PEG1 FIFO not full. See section 6.13.3.  
3
P1FNF  
RO,  
0
0 = No transition occurred since last read  
1 = Full-to-not-full transition occurred  
LH-E  
78  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
2
P1SC  
P1EC  
PEG1 Sequence Complete. Set when a repeat sequence in  
the PEG1 controller is complete. See section 6.13.3.  
0 = No repeat sequence completed since last read  
1 = Repeat sequence completed since last read  
PEG2 Event Complete. Set when a PEG2 event that is  
marked for status latching (PEG command FIFO bit 21=1)  
completes. See section 6.13.3.  
RO,  
LH-E  
0
1
0
RO,  
LH-E  
0
0
0 = No marked event completed since last read  
1 = Marked event completed since last read  
TAC  
Time Adjustment complete. See section 6.13.1.  
0 = No time adjustment completed since last read  
1 = Time adjustment completed since last read  
RO,  
LH-E  
7.2.19 PTP_IE  
The bits in this register are used to enable an interrupt to occur when the associated latched status bit in register  
PTP_IR is set. For each bit, 0=interrupt disabled; 1=interrupt enabled.  
PTP Interrupt Enable Register (MDIO Page 1.21, SPI 5)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
RO  
Reset  
15:14 Reserved  
Ignore on Read  
0
0
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
TS3_OF  
TS3_NE  
TS2_OF  
TS2_NE  
TS1_OF  
TS1_NE  
Reserved  
Interrupt Enable for TS3_OF  
Interrupt Enable for TS3_NE  
Interrupt Enable for TS2_OF  
Interrupt Enable for TS2_NE  
Interrupt Enable for TS1_OF  
Interrupt Enable for TS1_NE  
Ignore on Read  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
7
6
5
P2FNF  
P2SC  
Interrupt Enable for P2FNF  
Interrupt Enable for P2SC  
RW  
RW  
0
0
4
3
2
1
0
P2EC  
P1FNF  
P1SC  
P1EC  
TAC  
Interrupt Enable for P2EC  
Interrupt Enable for P1FNF  
Interrupt Enable for P1SC  
Interrupt Enable for P1EC  
Interrupt Enable for TAC  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
0
0
0
0
0
79  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.20 PTP_SR  
PTP Status Register (MDIO P1.22, SPI 6)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:10 Reserved  
Ignore on Read  
Timestamp 3 FIFO not empty real time status. See sections  
6.13.4 and 6.13.6.3.  
0 = Empty  
RO  
RO  
0
0
9
8
7
6
TS3_NE  
TS2_NE  
TS1_NE  
P2FF  
1 = Not empty  
Timestamp 2 FIFO not empty real time status. See sections  
6.13.4 and 6.13.6.3.  
0 = Empty  
1 = Not empty  
Timestamp 1 FIFO not empty real time status. See sections  
6.13.4 and 6.13.6.3.  
0 = Empty  
1 = Not empty  
RO  
RO  
RO  
0
0
0
PEG2 control FIFO full/not-full real time status. See section  
6.13.3.  
0 = Not full  
1 = Full  
5:4  
3
Reserved  
P1FF  
Ignore on Read  
PEG1 control FIFO full/not-full real time status. See section  
RO  
RO  
0
0
6.13.3.  
0 = Not full  
1 = Full  
2:1  
0
Reserved  
OVW_ERR  
Ignore on Read  
Indicates Ethernet or IP multicast address overwrite error.  
See section 6.13.7.7.  
RO  
RO,  
LH-E  
0
0
0 = No overwrite error since last read  
1 = Overwrite error since last read  
80  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.21 HDR_DAT1  
Header Data 1 Register (MDIO P1.23, SPI 7)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:12 MSG  
When a packet timestamp is read from one of the timestamp FIFOs  
into the TEIO registers, the message type is loaded into this field  
from the FIFO. The message type is the lower 4 bits of the control  
field from a 1588v1 message, or the 4-bit messageType field from a  
1588v2 message. See section 6.13.5.  
RO  
0
When an input signal timestamp is read from one of the timestamp  
FIFOs, this field should be ignored by system software.  
When a packet timestamp is read from one of the timestamp FIFOs  
into the TEIO registers, the 12-bit identity code is loaded into this  
field from the FIFO. See section 6.13.5.  
11:0  
UID  
RO  
0
When an input signal timestamp is read from one of the timestamp  
FIFOs, this field should be ignored by system software.  
7.2.22 HDR_DAT2  
Header Data 2 Register (MDIO P1.24, SPI 8)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
SEQ  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:0  
When a packet timestamp is read from one of the timestamp FIFOs  
into the TEIO registers, the 16-bit PTP (or TDMoIP) sequenceID is  
loaded into this register from the FIFO. See section 6.13.5.  
RO  
0
When an input signal timestamp is read from one of the timestamp  
FIFOs, this field should be ignored by system software.  
81  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.23 TEIO1 TEIO5  
The time engine I/O registers TEIO1 TEIO5 are used to (1) write time, period, and time adjustment information to  
the time engine (2) write commands to PEG1 and PEG2, (3) set values for mean path delay and correction field  
adjustment, (4) read the current time, and (5) read the timestamper FIFOs.  
The values in these registers are copied to the indirect register(s) specified by TERW.WRSEL when write control  
bit TERW.WR is set. The last values written to the TEIO registers can be read back until the registers are  
overwritten by system software or by a read of indirect registers. Values are copied to the TEIO registers from the  
indirect register(s) specified by TERW.RDSEL when TERW.RD is set. The TEIO registers are mapped to indirect  
registers as detailed in Table 7-3 and Table 7-4 below.  
Note that when TS3 is configured to timestamp ingress packets (TSCR.TS3SRC_SEL=0), when the TS3  
timestamp FIFO is read into the TEIO registers, the HDR_DAT1 and HDR_DAT2 registers are simultaneously  
updated from the TS3 FIFO. Similarly, when TS2 is configured to timestamp egress packets  
(TSCR.TS2SRC_SEL=0), when the TS2 timestamp FIFO is read into the TEIO registers, the HDR_DAT1 and  
HDR_DAT2 registers are simultaneously updated from the TS2 FIFO. Also, when a timestamper is configured to  
timestamp input signal edges (TSCR.TS3SRC_SEL¹0), when the timestamp FIFO is read into the TEIO registers,  
bit 15 of TEIO5 indicates the polarity of the input signal edge: 0=falling, 1=rising. See section 7.3.  
Table 7-3. TEIO Register Mapping to RDSEL Sources  
RDSEL  
000  
Source  
TIME  
TEIO1  
TEIO2  
TEIO3  
TEIO4  
NS[15:0]  
NS[15:0]  
TEIO5  
SEC[15:0]  
SEC[15:0]  
SEC[31:16]  
SEC[31:16]  
SEC[47:32]  
SEC[47:32]  
00,NS[29:16]  
EDGE, 0,  
NS[29:16]  
EDGE, 0,  
NS[29:16]  
EDGE, 0,  
NS[29:16]  
TS1_FIFO  
001  
TS2_FIFO  
TS3_FIFO  
SEC[15:0]  
SEC[15:0]  
SEC[31:16]  
SEC[31:16]  
SEC[47:32]  
SEC[47:32]  
NS[15:0]  
NS[15:0]  
010  
011  
Table 7-4. TEIO Register Mapping to WRSEL Destinations  
WRSEL  
Destination  
TIME  
TEIO1  
TEIO2  
TEIO3  
TEIO4  
TEIO5  
0000  
SEC[15:0]  
SEC[31:16]  
SEC[47:32]  
NS[15:0]  
NS[29:16]  
FRACNS[7:0],  
8'h00  
NS[7:0],  
FRAC[31:24]  
0001  
0010  
--  
--  
--  
FRAC[23:8]  
FRAC[23:8]  
PERIOD  
Time Adjust  
(PER_ADJ and  
ADJ_CNT)  
FRAC[7:0],  
COUNT[23:16]  
NS[7:0],  
FRAC[31:24]  
COUNT[15:0]  
8'h00, 00,  
FIFO[21:16]  
8'h00, 00,  
0011  
0100  
PEG1_FIFO  
PEG2_FIFO  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
FIFO[15:0]  
FIFO[15:0]  
FIFO[21:16]  
NS[13:0],  
FRAC[1:0]  
MEAN_PATH_DELAY  
Adjust  
1000  
--  
--  
--  
0, NS[28:14]  
Correction Field Adjust 1  
CF_COR1  
Correction Field Adjust 2  
CF_COR2  
Correction Field Adjust 3  
CF_COR3  
NS[13:0],  
FRAC[1:0]  
NS[13:0],  
FRAC[1:0]  
NS[13:0],  
FRAC[1:0]  
1001  
1010  
1011  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
NS[29:14]  
NS[29:14]  
NS[29:14]  
SEC=Seconds. NS=Nanoseconds. FRAC=Fractional nanoseconds.  
82  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Time Engine I/O Register 1 (MDIO P1.25, SPI 9)  
Bit(s)  
15:0  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
TEIO1  
See Table 7-3 and Table 7-4.  
RW  
0
Time Engine I/O Register 2 (MDIO P1.26, SPI 10)  
Bit(s) Name  
15:0  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
TEIO2  
See Table 7-3 and Table 7-4.  
RW  
0
Time Engine I/O Register 3 (MDIO P1.27, SPI 11)  
Bit(s) Name  
15:0  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
TEIO3  
See Table 7-3 and Table 7-4.  
RW  
0
Time Engine I/O Register 4 (MDIO P1.28, SPI 12)  
Bit(s) Name  
15:0  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
TEIO4  
See Table 7-3 and Table 7-4.  
RW  
0
Time Engine I/O Register 5 (MDIO P1.29, SPI 13)  
Bit(s) Name  
15:0  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
TEIO5  
See Table 7-3 and Table 7-4.  
RW  
0
7.2.24 TERW  
The TERW register is used to write the values of the TEIO registers into indirect registers as well as to read the  
values of indirect registers into the TEIO registers.  
Read and write operations can be requested at the same time. When this is done the current TEIO register values  
are written to the register specified by WRSEL, and then the values of the registers specified by RDSEL are read  
into TEIO registers.  
Time Engine Read/Write Register (MDIO P1.30, SPI 14)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
RD  
Set this bit to read the values of the indirect registers  
specified by RDSEL into the TEIO registers.  
Ignore on Read  
This field specifies the registers to be read into the TEIO  
registers when RD=1. See Table 7-3 for RDSEL decodes.  
Set this bit to write the values of the TEIO registers into the  
registers specified by WRSEL.  
RW,  
SC  
RO  
RW  
0
14:11 RSVD  
10:8  
0
0
RDSEL[2:0]  
7
WR  
RW,  
SC  
0
6:4  
3:0  
Reserved  
WRSEL[2:0]  
Ignore on Read  
This field specifies the registers to be written from the TEIO  
registers when WR=1. See Table 7-4 for WRSEL decodes.  
RO  
RW  
0
0
Note: SC = self-clearing.  
83  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.25 PTPCR1  
PTP Control Register 1 (MDIO P2.16, SPI 16)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
TE_RST  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
Time Engine Reset. This bit resets the logic of the 1588 time  
engine and related blocks. Self clearing. See section 6.3.1.  
0 = normal operation  
RW,  
SC  
0
1 = reset  
14  
PC_PM_DIS  
Packet Classifier, Packet Modifier Disable. This bit disables all  
packet classification (section 6.13.6) and packet modification  
(section 6.13.7) logic. To minimize packet classification and  
modification errors, this bit should be set before modifying PC or  
PM configuration registers and then cleared after all registers  
changes have been made. If PC_PM_DIS goes high in the middle  
of a packet, the PC and PM continue with existing configuration  
until end-of-packet and then are disabled. After setting  
PC_PM_DIS, system software should wait the duration of a  
maximum size packet before modifying PC/PM registers. When  
PC_PM_DIS goes low, the PC and PM ignore any packet in  
progress and start using the new configuration at the next start-of-  
packet.  
RW  
1
0 = Enabled  
1 = Disabled  
13  
12  
TOP_MODE  
TS3_FIFO  
Set to enable TOP mode. See section 6.13.8.  
0 = PTP mode. PTP packets are processed.  
1 = TOP mode. Circuit emulation packets are processed.  
Set to enable gating of TS3 FIFO entries. Used for TOP mode. See  
section 6.13.8.  
RW  
RW  
0
0
0 = Write all timestamps to the TS3 FIFO  
1 = Write an entry to the TS3 FIFO only when a new timestamp has  
been written to the TS1 FIFO since the last TS3 FIFO entry  
was written.  
11:7  
6
Reserved  
VID2FIFO  
Ignored on read  
RO  
RW  
0
0
VLAN ID to FIFO. See section 6.13.5.  
0 = Write 12-bit hash code of packet's sourcePortIdentity to FIFO  
1 = Write packet's outer VLAN ID to FIFO  
TX PLL Power Down. Setting this bit powers down and bypasses  
the TX PLL. See section 6.3.2.  
0 = Power-down disabled  
1 = Power-down enabled  
Datapath Power Down. Setting this bit disables clocks to the  
parallel MII, PCS encoder and decoder, the Ethernet/IP address  
replacement logic and all other parallel datapath logic, both receive  
and transmit. See section 6.3.2.  
5
4
PLL_PWDN  
DP_PWDN  
RW  
RW  
0
0
0 = Power-down disabled  
1 = Power-down enabled  
3
2
TX_PWDN  
RX_PWDN  
Serial Interface Transmit Power Down. Setting this bit powers down  
the transmit serializer and the TDP/TDN and TCLKP/TCLN output  
drivers. See section 6.3.2 and section 6.6.  
0 = Power-down disabled  
RW  
RW  
0
0
1 = Power-down enabled  
Serial Interface Receive Power Down. Setting this bit powers down  
the RDP/RDN inputs, the clock and data recovery PLL, and the de-  
serializer. See section 6.3.2 and section 6.6.  
0 = Power Down Disabled  
1 = Power Down Enabled  
84  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
1
PKT_PWDN  
Packet Classifier and Packet Modifier Power Down. Setting this bit  
disables clocks to the packet classifier and packet modifier logic,  
both ingress and egress. See section 6.3.2.  
0 = Power-down disabled  
RW  
0
1 = Power-down enabled  
0
TE_PWDN  
Time Engine Power Down. Setting this bit disables clocks to the  
time engine, output clock generator, PEGs and timestampers. See  
section 6.3.2.  
RW  
0
0 = Power-down disabled  
1 = Power-down enabled  
7.2.26 PTPCR2  
PTP Control Register 2 (MDIO P2.17, SPI 17)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
PTPOE  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
PTP over Ethernet - Multicast MAC DA. See section 6.13.7.7.  
0 = Disable checking and overwriting  
1 = Enable checking and overwriting  
PTP Peer-to-peer over Ethernet Multicast MAC DA. See section  
6.13.7.7.  
0 = Disable checking and overwriting  
1 = Enable checking and overwriting  
PTP primary over IP - Multicast MAC DA and IP DA. See section  
6.13.7.7.  
0 = Disable checking and overwriting  
1 = Enable checking and overwriting  
PTP alternate-1 over IP - Multicast MAC DA and IP DA. See section  
6.13.7.7.  
0 = Disable checking and overwriting  
1 = Enable checking and overwriting  
PTP alternate-2 over IP - Multicast MAC DA and IP DA. See section  
6.13.7.7.  
0 = Disable checking and overwriting  
1 = Enable checking and overwriting  
PTP alternate-3 over IP - Multicast MAC DA and IP DA. See section  
6.13.7.7.  
0 = Disable checking and overwriting  
1 = Enable checking and overwriting  
PTP Peer-to-Peer over IP - Multicast MAC DA and IP DA. See  
section 6.13.7.7.  
RW  
0
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
P2POE  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
0
0
0
0
0
0
PTPOIP  
PTP1OIP  
PTP2OIP  
PTP3OIP  
P2POIP  
0 = Disable checking and overwriting  
1 = Enable checking and overwriting  
PTP_CLKO Invert Control. See section 6.13.2.  
0 = Non-inverted  
8
CLKO_INV  
RO  
RW  
0
0
1 = Inverted  
7:0  
CLKO_DIV[7:0] Sets the PTP_CLKO output frequency by dividing 125MHz by  
CLKO_DIV which can be 1 to 255. When CLKO_DIV = 0 the output  
clock is disabled. See section 6.13.2.  
85  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.27 TSCR  
Timestamp Control Register (MDIO P2.18, SPI 18)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:14 TS3_EDGE[1:0]  
Specifies which signal edge(s) should be timestamped by  
timestamper 3. When T3SRC_SEL=0 this field is ignored.  
See section 6.13.4.  
RW  
0
00 = None  
01 = Positive edge  
10 = Negative edge  
11 = Both edges  
13:12 TS3SRC_SEL[1:0]  
11:10 TS2_EDGE[1:0]  
Specifies the source of the signal going to the TS3  
timestamper. See sections 6.13.4 and 6.13.5.  
00 = Ingress packet start of packet  
01 = GPIO1  
10 = GPIO2  
11 = GPIO3  
Specifies which signal edge(s) should be timestamped by  
timestamper 2. When T2SRC_SEL=0 this field is ignored.  
See section 6.13.4.  
RW  
RW  
0
0
00 = None  
01 = Positive edge  
10 = Negative edge  
11 = Both edges  
9:8  
7:6  
5:4  
TS2SRC_SEL[1:0]  
TS1_EDGE[1:0]  
Specifies the source of the signal going to the TS2  
timestamper. See section 6.13.4 and 6.13.5.  
00 = Egress packet start of packet  
01 = GPIO1  
10 = GPIO2  
11 = GPIO3  
Specifies which signal edge(s) should be timestamped by  
timestamper 1. See section 6.13.4.  
00 = None  
01 = Positive edge  
10 = Negative edge  
RW  
RW  
RW  
0
0
0
11 = Both edges  
TS1SRC_SEL[1:0]  
Specifies the source of the signal going to the TS1  
timestamper. The signal frequency is divided by the values  
specified by TS1_DIV1 and TSCR.TS1_DIV2 before going to  
the TS1 timestamper. See section 6.13.4. The PEG1  
feedback signal is used in TOP mode (see section 6.13.8).  
00 = PEG1 feedback signal  
01 = GPIO1  
10 = GPIO2  
11 = GPIO3  
3
Reserved  
Ignore on read  
RO  
RW  
0
0
2:0  
TS1_DIV2[2:0]  
Configures the second of two input signal dividers associated  
with timestamper 1.The second divider is configured by  
TS1_DIV1. See section 6.13.4.  
000 = Do not divide  
001 = Divide by 10  
010 = Divide by 100  
011 = Divide by 1000  
100 = Divide by 2  
101 = Divide by 80  
86  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
110 = Divide by 800  
111 = Divide by 8000  
7.2.28 PEGCR  
PEG Control Register (MDIO P2.19, SPI 19)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Reserved  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:7  
Ignore on read  
RO  
0
6
P2RST  
A low-to-high transition of this bit causes programmable  
event generator 2 (PEG2) to reset. This empties the PEG2  
command FIFO, resets the PEG2 control logic, and causes  
PEG2’s output signal to be driven low. See section 6.13.3.  
PEG2 disable. This bit can be used to delay the processing  
of the commands written to the PEG2 FIFO. See section  
6.13.3.  
RW  
0
5
P2DIS  
RW  
0
0 = enable processing new commands  
1 = disable processing new commands  
PEG2 resolution. See section 6.13.3.  
4
P2RES  
RW  
0
0 = 1 nanosecond resolution  
1 = 1/256 nanosecond resolution  
3
2
Reserved  
P1RST  
Ignore on read  
RO  
RW  
0
0
A low-to-high transition of this bit causes programmable  
event generator 1 (PEG1) to reset. This empties the PEG1  
command FIFO, resets the PEG1 control logic, and causes  
PEG1’s output signal to be driven low. See section 6.13.3.  
PEG1 disable. This bit can be used to delay the processing  
of the commands written to the PEG1 FIFO. See section  
6.13.3.  
0 = enable processing new commands  
1 = disable processing new commands  
PEG1 resolution. See section 6.13.3.  
1
0
P1DIS  
RW  
RW  
0
0
P1RES  
0 = 1 nanosecond resolution  
1 = 1/256 nanosecond resolution  
7.2.29 TS1_DIV1  
Timestamper 1 Divider 1 Register (MDIO P2.20, SPI 20)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:0  
TS1_DIV1[15:0]  
Configures the first of two input signal dividers associated  
with timestamper 1. TS1_DIV1=0 or 1 bypasses this divider  
(i.e. divide by 1). The second divider is configured by  
TSCR.TS1_DIV2. See section 6.13.4.  
RW  
0
87  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.30 TS_FIFO_EN  
For these bits to have any effect, the timestamp FIFOs must be configured to accept ingress or egress packet  
timestamps using register TSCR bit fields TS2SRC_SEL (egress) and TS3SRC_SEL (ingress). See section  
6.13.6.3.  
Timestamp FIFO Enable Register (MDIO 2.21, SPI 21)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
EM7_EN  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
Enable egress message type 0x7 (Reserved) to TS2 FIFO  
RW  
0
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
EM6_EN  
EM5_EN  
EM4_EN  
EM3_EN  
EM2_EN  
EM1_EN  
EM0_EN  
IM7_EN  
IM6_EN  
IM5_EN  
IM4_EN  
IM3_EN  
IM2_EN  
IM1_EN  
IM0_EN  
Enable egress message type 0x6 (Reserved) to TS2 FIFO  
Enable egress message type 0x5 (Reserved) to TS2 FIFO  
Enable egress message type 0x4 (Reserved) to TS2 FIFO  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Enable egress message type 0x3 (Pdelay_Resp) to TS2  
FIFO  
Enable egress message type 0x2 (Pdelay_Req) to TS2  
FIFO  
Enable egress message type 0x1 (Delay_Req) to TS2 FIFO  
8
Enable egress message type 0x0 (Sync) to TS2 FIFO  
Enable ingress message type 0x7 (Reserved) to TS3 FIFO  
Enable ingress message type 0x6 (Reserved) to TS3 FIFO  
Enable ingress message type 0x5 (Reserved) to TS3 FIFO  
Enable ingress message type 0x4 (Reserved) to TS3 FIFO  
7
6
5
4
3
Enable ingress message type 0x3 (Pdelay_Resp) to TS3  
FIFO  
Enable ingress message type 0x2 (Pdelay_Req) to TS3  
FIFO  
Enable ingress message type 0x1 (Delay_Req) to TS3 FIFO  
2
1
0
Enable ingress message type 0x0 (Sync) to TS3 FIFO  
88  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.31 TS_INSERT_EN  
Timestamp Insertion Enable Register (MDIO 2.22, SPI 22)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
TC_CF_PD (Note 1) Enables one-step transparent clock residence time correction  
for Pdelay_Req and Pdelay_Resp event messages. Ignored  
when TC_CF_EN=0. See section 6.13.7.4.  
RW  
0
14  
13  
CLR_TS_INS  
When this bit is set the MAX24288 clears the bytes specified  
by the fields of the TS_INSERT register in egress messages.  
See section 6.13.7.2.  
Enables insertion of ingress packet timestamp and PEG1  
feedback timestamp into ingress circuit emulation messages.  
Ignored when PTPCR1.TOP_MODE = 0. See section 6.13.8.  
RW  
RW  
0
0
TOP_EN  
12  
11  
10  
9
TC_CF_EN (Note 1) Enables one-step transparent clock residence time  
correction. See section 6.13.7.4.  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
EM3_EN (Note 1)  
EM2_EN (Note 1)  
EM1_EN (Note 1)  
EM0_EN (Note 1)  
IM7_EN  
Enables one-step operation for egress type 0x3  
(Pdelay_Resp) messages. See section 6.13.7.3.  
Enables one-step operation for egress type 0x2  
(Pdelay_Req) messages. See section 6.13.7.3.  
Enables one-step operation for egress type 0x1  
(Delay_Req) messages. See section 6.13.7.3.  
Enables one-step operation for egress type 0x0  
(Sync) messages. See section 6.13.7.3.  
8
7
Enables writing ingress timestamps into ingress type 0x7  
(Reserved) messages. See section 6.13.7.1.  
6
IM6_EN  
Enables writing ingress timestamps into ingress type 0x6  
(Reserved) messages. See section 6.13.7.1.  
5
IM5_EN  
Enables writing ingress timestamps into ingress type 0x5  
(Reserved) messages. See section 6.13.7.1.  
4
IM4_EN  
Enables writing ingress timestamps into ingress type 0x4  
(Reserved) messages. See section 6.13.7.1.  
3
IM3_EN  
Enables writing ingress timestamps into ingress type 0x3  
(Pdelay_Resp) messages. See section 6.13.7.1.  
Enables writing ingress timestamps into ingress type 0x2  
(Pdelay_Req) messages. See section 6.13.7.1.  
Enables writing ingress timestamps into ingress type 0x1  
(Delay_Req) messages. See section 6.13.7.1.  
Enables writing ingress timestamps into ingress type 0x0  
(Sync) messages. See section 6.13.7.1.  
2
IM2_EN  
1
IM1_EN  
0
IM0_EN  
Note 1: If EM0_EN=1, the state of TC_CF_EN is ignored for Sync messages.  
If EM1_EN=1, the state of TC_CF_EN is ignored for Delay_Req messages.  
If EM2_EN=1, the state of TC_CF_PD is ignored for Pdelay_Req messages.  
If EM3_EN=1, the state of TC_CF_PD is ignored for Pdelay_Resp messages.  
89  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.32 TS_INSERT  
Timestamp Insertion Control Register (MDIO 2.23, SPI 23)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:14 SEC_ENA[1:0]  
Enables writing the seconds field of the ingress timestamp  
into PTP ingress packets at the offset specified by the  
SEC_OFF field. See section 6.13.7.1.  
RW  
0
00 = Disable writing seconds  
01 = Enable, write SEC[7:0] (1 byte)  
10 = Enable, write SEC[31:0] (4 byte)  
11 = Enable, write SEC[47:0] (6 byte)  
13:8  
SEC_OFF[5:0]  
RW  
0
When SEC_ENA¹00, this field specifies the byte offset from  
the start of the PTP message header to the point at which  
the seconds information should be written. SEC_OFF=0  
specifies the first byte of the PTP message header. See  
section 6.13.7.1.  
7
6
Reserved  
Ignore on Read  
RO  
RW  
0
0
NSEC_ENA  
PTPCR1.TOP_MODE=0:  
Enables writing the nanoseconds field of the ingress  
timestamp into PTP ingress packets at the offset specified  
by the NSEC_OFF field. See section 6.13.7.1.  
0 = Disable writing nanoseconds  
1 = Enable, write NSEC[29:0] (4 bytes, bits 31:30 set to 0).  
PTPCR1.TOP_MODE=1:  
When TS_INSERT_EN.TOP_EN=1, this bit enables writing  
timestamp information into ingress circuit emulation packets  
at the offset specified by the NSEC_OFF field. See section  
6.13.8.  
0 = Disable writing timestamp information  
1 = Enable, write 10 bytes of timestamp information and  
correction information as described in the Writing  
Timestamps to the Ingress Packet paragraph in section  
6.13.8.  
5:0  
NSEC_OFF[5:0]  
PTPCR1.TOP_MODE=0:  
RW  
0
When NSEC_ENA¹0, this field specifies the byte offset from  
the start of the PTP message header to the point at which  
the nanoseconds information should be written. See section  
6.13.7.1.  
PTPCR1.TOP_MODE=1:  
When NSEC_ENA¹0, this field specifies the byte offset from  
the start of the sequence number (in circuit emulation  
control word) to the point at which the ingress packet  
timestamp and the PEG1 feedback timestamp should be  
written. See section 6.13.8.  
NSEC_OFF=0 specifies the first byte of the PTP message  
header or the first byte of the circuit emulation control word.  
90  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.33 CF_INGRESS  
Each 2-bit field below selects one of 3 registers to add to the ingress event message correctionField of a specific  
PTP event message type.  
00 = Do not add anything to correctionField  
01 = Add CF_COR1 to correctionField  
10 = Add CF_COR2 to correctionField  
11 = Add CF_COR3 to correctionField  
Ingress Correction Field Register (MDIO 2.24, SPI 24)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:14 IM7_CF[1:0]  
13:12 IM6_CF[1:0]  
11:10 IM5_CF[1:0]  
Add selected value to correctionField of ingress type 0x7  
(Reserved) messages. See section 6.13.7.6.  
Add selected value to correctionField of ingress type 0x6  
(Reserved) messages. See section 6.13.7.6.  
Add selected value to correctionField of ingress type 0x5  
(Reserved) messages. See section 6.13.7.6.  
Add selected value to correctionField of ingress type 0x4  
(Reserved) messages. See section 6.13.7.6.  
Add selected value to correctionField of ingress type 0x3  
(Pdelay_Resp) messages. See section 6.13.7.6.  
Add selected value to correctionField of ingress type 0x2  
(Pdelay_Req) messages. See section 6.13.7.6.  
Add selected value to correctionField of ingress type 0x1  
(Delay_Req) messages. See section 6.13.7.6.  
RW  
0
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9:8  
7:6  
5:4  
3:2  
1:0  
IM4_CF[1:0]  
IM3_CF[1:0]  
IM2_CF[1:0]  
IM1_CF[1:0]  
IM0_CF[1:0]  
Add selected value to correctionField of ingress type 0x0  
(Sync) messages. See section 6.13.7.6.  
91  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.34 CF_EGRESS  
Each 2-bit field below selects one of 3 registers to subtract from the egress event message correctionField of a  
specific PTP event message type.  
00 = Do not subtract anything from correctionField  
01 = Subtract CF_COR1 from correctionField  
10 = Subtract CF_COR2 from correctionField  
11 = Subtract CF_COR3 from correctionField  
Egress Correction Field Register (MDIO 2.25, SPI 25)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:14 EM7_CF[1:0]  
13:12 EM6_CF[1:0]  
11:10 EM5_CF[1:0]  
Subtract selected value from correctionField of egress type  
0x7 (Reserved) messages. See section 6.13.7.6.  
Subtract selected value from correctionField of egress type  
0x6 (Reserved) messages. See section 6.13.7.6.  
Subtract selected value from correctionField of egress type  
0x5 (Reserved) messages. See section 6.13.7.6.  
Subtract selected value from correctionField of egress type  
0x4 (Reserved) messages. See section 6.13.7.6.  
Subtract selected value from correctionField of egress type  
0x3 (Pdelay_Resp) messages. See section 6.13.7.6.  
Subtract selected value from correctionField of egress type  
0x2 (Pdelay_Req) messages. See section 6.13.7.6.  
Subtract selected value from correctionField of egress type  
0x1 (Delay_Req) messages. See section 6.13.7.6.  
Subtract selected value from correctionField of egress type  
0x0 (Sync) messages. See section 6.13.7.6.  
RW  
0
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9:8  
7:6  
5:4  
3:2  
1:0  
EM4_CF[1:0]  
EM3_CF[1:0]  
EM2_CF[1:0]  
EM1_CF[1:0]  
EM0_CF[1:0]  
92  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.35 PTPCR3  
PTP Control Register 3 (MDIO P2.26, SPI 26)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:13 EXT_SRC[2:0]  
External clock source. When EXT_CLK_EN=1, this field  
specifies the source of EXT_CLK signal tracked by the 1588  
time engine. See section 6.13.1.4.  
000 = REFCLK pin  
RW  
0
001 = GPIO1 pin  
010 = GPIO2 pin  
011 = GPIO3 pin  
100 = GPIO4 pin  
101 = GPIO5 pin  
110 = GPIO6 pin  
111 = GPIO7 pin  
12  
EXT_CLK_EN  
External clock enable. See section 6.13.1.4.  
0 = The rate at which time advances in the 1588 time engine  
is controlled by the PERIOD register and the REFCLK  
signal  
1 = The rate at which time advances in the 1588 time engine  
is controlled by the fractional frequency offset of the  
EXT_CLK signal.  
Set this bit to internally divide the EXT_CLK frequency. Must  
be non-zero for EXT_CLK frequencies >= 125MHz. See  
section 6.13.1.4.  
00 = don't divide  
01 = divide by 2  
10 = divide by 4  
11 = divide by 8  
Specifies the maximum number of nanoseconds to adjust the  
time engine accumulator period from the nominal value set  
by the PERIOD register. See section 6.13.1.4.  
00 = 0.5ns  
01 = 1ns  
10 = 2ns  
RW  
RW  
RW  
RW  
0
0
0
0
11:10 EXT_DIV[1:0]  
9:8  
7:0  
EXT_LIM[1:0]  
EXT_PER[7:0]  
11 = 3ns  
Specifies the nominal period, in integer nanoseconds, of the  
EXT_CLK signal AFTER the divider controlled by EXT_DIV.  
Examples 8 = 125MHz, 100 = 10MHz. See section 6.13.1.4.  
93  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.36 UID_CHK  
UID Check Register (MDIO 2.28, SPI 28)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
CHK_EN  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
For each ingress PTP message a 12-bit identity code is  
computed from the 10-byte sourcePortIdentity field (1588v2)  
or the messageType, sourceCommunicationTechnology and  
sourceUuid fields (1588v1). When this CHK_EN bit is set,  
the computed identity code must match the value stored in  
UID_CHK.UID for the message timestamp to be stored in  
the TS3 FIFO (if enabled as described in section 6.13.6.3).  
This does not affect on-the-fly packet modification as  
described in section 6.13.7.  
RW  
0
14:12 Reserved  
11:0 UID[11:0]  
Ignore when Read  
RO  
RW  
0
0
The expected 12-bit identity code described in  
UID_CHK.CHK_EN.  
94  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.37 PKT_CLASS  
Packet Classifier Configuration Register (MDIO 3.16, SPI 32)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
MEF_CFG  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
HPC should examine PTP over MEF pseudowire header  
packets with MEF ECID specified by MEF_ECID. See  
section 6.13.6.1.  
RW  
0
0 = disable  
1 = enable  
14  
13  
MPLS_UCAST  
MPLS_MCAST  
HPC should examine PTP over MPLS unicast over Ethernet  
packets (Ethertype=0x8847, MPLS inner label specified by  
MPLS_LABEL) See section 6.13.6.1.  
0 = disable  
RW  
RW  
0
0
1 = enable  
HPC should examine PTP over MPLS multicast over  
Ethernet packets (Ethertype=0x8848, MPLS inner label  
specified by MPLS_LABEL). See section 6.13.6.1.  
0 = disable  
1 = enable  
12  
11  
10  
ENET_CFG  
ENET  
HPC should examine PTP over 802.3/Ethernet packets with  
Ethertype set by ETYPE_ALT. See section 6.13.6.1.  
0 = disable  
RW  
RW  
RW  
0
0
0
1 = enable  
HPC should examine PTP over 802.3/Ethernet packets  
(Ethertype 0x88F7). See section 6.13.6.1.  
0 = disable  
1 = enable  
UDP_IPv6  
HPC should examine PTP over UDP/IPv6/Ethernet packets.  
(Ethertype=0x86DD, UDP destination and/or source port  
specified by UDP_SRC and UDP_DST). See section  
6.13.6.1.  
0 = disable  
1 = enable  
9
UDP_IPv4  
HPC should examine PTP over UDP/IPv4/Ethernet packets.  
(Ethertype=0x0800, UDP destination and/or source port  
specified by UDP_SRC and UDP_DST). See section  
6.13.6.1.  
RW  
0
0 = disable  
1 = enable  
8:5  
4
CFG_START  
CFG_OR  
CFG_START[3:0] Specifies where to start the CPC  
comparisons. See Table 6-22 for encodings.  
This bit specifies whether the CPC criteria are in addition to  
the HPC criteria ("AND") or are instead of some or all of the  
HPC criteria ("OR"). See section 6.13.6.2.  
0 = AND (both CPC AND HPC criteria must be met)  
1 = OR (either CPC OR HPC criteria must be met)  
Specifies how the versionPTP field of incoming packets is  
compared to the PTP_VERSION register field.  
0 = versionPTP must be <= PTP_VERSION  
1 = versionPTP must be equal to PTP_VERSION  
Packets must have the lower three bits of the PTP  
versionPTP field "match" this register field to be qualified.  
The match comparison can be "equal to" or "less than or  
equal to" as specified by the VER_EXACT field. See section  
6.13.6.1.  
RW  
RW  
0
0
3
VER_EXACT  
RW  
RW  
0
0
2:0  
PTP_VERSION[2:0]  
95  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.38 VLAN2_ID  
VLAN ID Register (MDIO 3.17, SPI 33)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:0  
VLAN2_ID[15:0]  
An alternate (optional) 16-bit Ethertype code for VLAN  
headers. See section 6.13.6.  
RW  
0x8100  
7.2.39 MEF_ECID_HI  
MEF ECID Upper Word Register (MDIO 3.20, SPI 36)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:0  
MEF_ECID[19:4]  
The 20-bit MEF_ECID field spans this register and  
MEF_ECID_LO. When PKT_CLASS. MEF_CFG=1, MEF  
packets must have an ECID field that matches this field to  
be qualified. See section 6.13.6.1.  
RW  
0
7.2.40 MEF_ECID_LO  
MEF ECID Lower Word Register (MDIO 3.21, SPI 37)  
Bit(s) Name  
15:12 MEF_ECID[3:0]  
11:0 Reserved  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
See the MEF_ECID_HI register description above.  
RW  
0
RO  
0
7.2.41 MPLS_LABEL_HI  
MPLS LABEL Upper Word Register (MDIO 3.22, SPI 38)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:0  
MPLS_LABEL[19:4]  
The 20-bit MPLS_LABEL field spans this register and  
MPLS_LABEL_LO. When PKT_CLASS. MPLS_UCAST =1  
or PKT_CLASS. MPLS_MCAST =1, MPLS packets must  
have an inner MPLS label that matches this field to be  
qualified. See section 6.13.6.1.  
RW  
0
7.2.42 MPLS_LABEL_LO  
MPLS LABEL Lower Word Register (MDIO 3.23, SPI 39)  
Bit(s)  
15:12 MPLS_LABEL[3:0]  
11:0 Reserved  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
See the MPLS_LABEL_HI register description above.  
RW  
0
RO  
0
96  
 
 
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.43 ETYPE_ALT  
User Configurable Ethertype Register (MDIO 3.24, SPI 40)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:0  
ETYPE_ALT[15:0]  
When PKT_CLASS. ENET_CFG=1, packets with an  
Ethertype that matches this field can be qualified if all other  
configured criteria are met. See section 6.13.6.1.  
RW  
0
7.2.44 UDP_SRC  
UDP Source Port Register (MDIO 3.25, SPI 41)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:0  
UDP_SRC[15:0]  
RW  
0xFFFF  
When UDP_SRC¹0xFFFF, if PKT_CLASS.UDP_IPv4=1,  
IPv4 packets must have a UDP source port number that  
matches this field to be qualified.  
When UDP_SRC¹0xFFFF, if PKT_CLASS.UDP_IPv6=1,  
IPv6 packets must have a UDP source port number that  
matches this field to be qualified.  
When UDP_SRC=0xFFFF, UDP source port number  
matching is disabled. See section 6.13.6.1.  
7.2.45 UDP_DST  
UDP Destination Port Register (MDIO 3.26, SPI 42)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:0  
UDP_DST[15:0]  
RW  
0x013F  
(319  
decimal)  
When UDP_DST¹0xFFFF, if PKT_CLASS.UDP_IPv4=1,  
IPv4 packets must have a UDP destination port number that  
matches this field to be qualified.  
When UDP_SRC¹0xFFFF, if PKT_CLASS.UDP_IPv6=1,  
IPv6 packets must have a UDP destination port number that  
matches this field to be qualified.  
When UDP_SRC=0xFFFF, UDP destination port number  
matching is disabled. See section 6.13.6.1.  
97  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.46 CFG_MASK  
Configurable Packet Classifier Mask Register (MDIO 3.27, SPI 43)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:0  
CFG_MASK[15:0]  
Together, CFG_MASK, CFG_MATCH, CFG_OFFSET and  
CFG_WR are used to write and enable/disable any of eight  
configurable packet classifier criteria. See section 6.13.6.2.  
RW  
0
CFG_MASK specifies which bits are to be compared at the  
position in the packet specified by CFG_OFFSET.  
0 = Don't compare  
1 = Compare  
Bit 15 is the most significant bit of the 16-bit word and is the  
first bit transmitted or received.  
7.2.47 CFG_MATCH  
Configurable Packet Classifier Match Register (MDIO 3.28, SPI 44)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:0  
CFG_MATCH[15:0]  
CFG_MATCH specifies the values of bits to be compared in  
a configurable packet classifier criterion. See section  
6.13.6.2.  
RW  
0
When a bit of CFG_MASK=0, the corresponding bit of the  
packet is not checked and the corresponding bit of  
CFG_MATCH is ignored.  
When a bit of CFG_MASK=1, the corresponding bit of the  
packet must match the corresponding bit of CFG_MATCH to  
meet the configurable criterion.  
Bit 15 is the most significant bit of the 16-bit word and is the  
first bit transmitted or received.  
7.2.48 CFG_OFFSET  
Configurable Packet Classifier Offset Register (MDIO 3.29, SPI 45)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
ENABLE  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
Enables the configurable packet classifier criterion. Ignored  
when CFG_WR.CFG_SEL=0xF. See section 6.13.6.2.  
0 = Disable the packet classifier criterion  
RW  
0
1 = Enable the packet classifier criterion  
14:8  
7:0  
Reserved  
RO  
RW  
0
0
OFFSET[7:0]  
Specifies the offset in bytes from the CPC start position to  
the compare point of the configurable criterion. See section  
6.13.6.2. Note: the value of this field must be less than  
PTP_OFFSET + 32.  
98  
 
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.2.49 CFG_WR  
Configurable Packet Classifier Write Register (MDIO 3.30, SPI 46)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Reserved  
Description  
R/W  
Reset  
15:8  
RO  
0
7
WR  
Set this bit to write CFG_MASK, CFG_MATCH and  
CFG_OFFSET to the packet classifier criterion specified by  
the CFG_SEL field or to write CFG_OFFSET to the  
PTP_OFFSET indirect register. See section 6.13.6.2.  
RW  
SC  
0
6:4  
3:0  
Reserved  
RO  
RW  
0
0
CFG_SEL[3:0]  
This field specifies the indirect register(s) that are written  
when the WR bit is set to 1. See section 6.13.6.2.  
0000 = Write packet classifier criterion 0  
0001 = Write packet classifier criterion 1  
0010 = Write packet classifier criterion 2  
0011 = Write packet classifier criterion 3  
0100 = Write packet classifier criterion 4  
0101 = Write packet classifier criterion 5  
0110 = Write packet classifier criterion 6  
0111 = Write packet classifier criterion 7  
1000 1110 = unused values  
1111 = Write CFG_OFFSET to the PTP_OFFSET indirect  
register  
7.2.50 PHY_MATCH  
PHY Address Match Register (not accessible through MDIO, SPI 47)  
Bit(s)  
Name  
Description  
Factory Test. Always write 0.  
R/W  
Reset  
15  
TEST  
RW  
0
14:6  
5
Reserved  
ENABLE  
Enables SPI device address matching for common chip-  
select applications. When ENABLE=1, only the device  
whose PHY_MATCH.ADDR field matches the MDIO PHY  
address latched from pins at reset responds to SPI read and  
write commands. Devices where the addresses don’t match  
ignore all SPI read and write commands except writes to this  
PHY_MATCH register. See section 6.4.  
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
4:0  
ADDR[4:0]  
The PHY_MATCH address. See the ENABLE bit description  
above. See section 6.4.  
99  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.3  
IEEE1588 Indirect Registers  
7.3.1 TIME  
Format  
48 bits of seconds, 30 bits of ns.  
Read Access  
Write TERW with RD=1 and RDSEL=000 then read time from TEIO1 TEIO5 as shown in  
Table 7-3.  
Write Access  
Description  
Write time to TEIO1 TEIO5 as shown in Table 7-4 and then write TERW with WR=1 and  
WRSEL=0000.  
The time in the accumulator of the time engine can be written or read directly through this  
register. See section 6.13.1.  
7.3.2 PERIOD  
Format  
Read Access  
Write Access  
8 bits of ns, 32 bits of fractional ns (i.e. 40 bits with lsb of 2-32ns)  
None  
Write period to TEIO3 TEIO5 as shown in Table 7-4 and then write TERW with WR=1 and  
WRSEL=0001.  
Description  
The value in this register is added to the accumulator in the time engine every cycle of the  
125MHz master clock. See Figure 6-13 and Figure 6-14. In free-run, period is set to exactly  
8.0ns (0x08 0000 0000). When tracking a timing master, the period register is continually  
adjusted by system software as part of a hardware-software PLL. See section 6.13.1.  
7.3.3 PER_ADJ  
Format  
Read Access  
Write Access  
8 bits of ns, 32 bits of fractional ns (i.e. 40 bits with lsb of 2-32ns). 2s-complement.  
None  
Write period adjustment to TEIO3 TEIO5 and write count to TEIO2 TEIO3 as shown in  
Table 7-4 and then write TERW with WR=1 and WRSEL=0010.  
Description  
To perform a precise time adjustment, both the PER_ADJ value and the PERIOD value are  
added to the accumulator in the time engine for the number of 125MHz master clock cycles  
specified in the ADJ_CNT register. This results in an exact time change equal to PER_ADJ *  
ADJ_CNT. See Figure 6-13 and Figure 6-14 in section 6.13.1.  
7.3.4 ADJ_CNT  
Format  
24-bit unsigned integer  
Read Access  
Write Access  
None  
Write period adjustment to TEIO3 TEIO5 and write count to TEIO2 TEIO3 as shown in  
Table 7-4 and then write TERW with WR=1 and WRSEL=0010.  
This register specifies the number of 125MHz master clock cycles that the PER_ADJ field  
should be added to the accumulator in the time engine. See the PER_ADJ register description  
for more details.  
Description  
7.3.5 PEG1_FIFO, PEG2_FIFO  
Format  
22-bit FIFO command. See Table 6-18.  
Read Access  
Write Access  
None  
Write command to TEIO4 TEIO5 as shown in Table 7-4 and then write TERW with WR=1  
and WRSEL=0011 for PEG1 or WRSEL=0100 for PEG2.  
Commands for the programmable event generators, PEG1 and PEG2, are written to the  
command FIFOs through these registers. See section 6.13.3.  
Description  
100  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
7.3.6 TS1_FIFO, TS2_FIFO, TS3_FIFO  
Format  
48 bits of seconds, 30 bits of ns.  
For packet timestamps, 4 bit message type, 12-bit identity code and 16-bit sequence number.  
For input signal timestamps, 1 bit edge polarity.  
Read Access  
Write TERW with RD=1 and RDSEL=001 for TS1_FIFO, RDSEL=010 for TS2_FIFO, or  
RDSEL=011 for TS3_FIFO then read timestamp from TEIO1 TEIO5 as shown in Table 7-3.  
For packet timestamps, also read message type, identity code and sequence number from  
HDR_DAT1 and HDR_DAT2.  
Write Access  
Description  
None  
Timestamps, of packets or input signal edges, are read from the timestamp FIFOs through  
these registers. See sections 6.13.4 and 6.13.5.  
7.3.7 MEAN_PATH_DELAY  
Format  
29 bits of ns, 2 bits of fractional ns (i.e. 31 bits with lsb of 2-2=0.25 ns). Unsigned.  
Read Access  
Write Access  
None  
Write value to TEIO4 TEIO5 as shown in Table 7-4 and then write TERW with WR=1 and  
WRSEL=1000.  
Description  
The value in this register is automatically added to the correctionField of ingress Sync packets  
on-the-fly. See section 6.13.7.5.  
7.3.8 CF_COR1, CF_COR2, CF_COR3  
Format  
30 bits of ns, 2 bits of fractional ns (i.e. 32 bits with lsb of 2-2=0.25 ns). 2s-complement.  
Read Access  
Write Access  
None  
Write value to TEIO4 TEIO5 as shown in Table 7-4 and then write TERW with WR=1 and  
WRSEL=1001 for CF_COR1, WRSEL=1010 for CF_COR2, or WRSEL=1011 for CF_COR3.  
The three registers hold values that can be added to the correctionField of event messages  
on ingress and/or egress to correct for path asymmetries. See section 6.13.7.6.  
Description  
7.3.9 Configurable Packet Classifier Criteria  
Format  
16-bit match register, 16-bit mask register, 8-bit offset (unsigned), 1-bit enable  
Read Access  
Write Access  
None  
Write the match value to CFG_MATCH, the mask to CFG_MASK, the offset to CFG_OFFSET  
(and set CFG_OFFSET.ENABLE=0 or 1) then write the CFG_WR register with the number of  
the CPC matching criterion in the CFG_SEL field and WR=1.  
Description  
This match/mask/offset set of registers allow up to eight custom criteria to be set up for the  
configurable packet classifier (CPC). See section 6.13.6.2.  
7.3.10 PTP_OFFSET  
Format  
8-bit offset value (unsigned)  
Read Access  
Write Access  
Description  
None  
Write the value to CFG_OFFSET then write CFG_WR register with CFG_SEL=1111, WR=1.  
This register specifies the offset from the CPC start position to the start of the PTP packet  
header for CPC OR mode. See section 6.13.6.2.2.  
101  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
8. JTAG Test Access Port and Boundary Scan  
8.1 JTAG Description  
The MAX24288 supports the standard instruction codes SAMPLE/PRELOAD, BYPASS, and EXTEST. Optional  
public instructions included are HIGHZ, CLAMP, and IDCODE. Figure 8-1 shows a block diagram. The MAX24288  
contains the following items, which meet the requirements set by the IEEE 1149.1 Standard Test Access Port and  
Boundary Scan Architecture:  
Test Access Port (TAP)  
TAP Controller  
Bypass Register  
Boundary Scan Register  
Device Identification Register  
Instruction Register  
The TAP has the necessary interface pins, namely JTCLK, JTRST_N, JTDI, JTDO, and JTMS. Details on these  
pins can be found in Table 5-5 Details about the boundary scan architecture and the TAP can be found in  
IEEE 1149.1-1990, IEEE 1149.1a-1993, and IEEE 1149.1b-1994.  
Figure 8-1. JTAG Block Diagram  
BOUNDARY  
SCAN  
REGISTER  
DEVICE  
IDENTIFICATION  
REGISTER  
BYPASS  
REGISTER  
INSTRUCTION  
REGISTER  
SELECT  
TEST ACCESS PORT  
TRI-STATE  
CONTROLLER  
50k  
50k  
50k  
JTDI  
JTMS  
JTCLK  
JTRST_  
JTDO  
8.2 JTAG TAP Controller State Machine Description  
This section discusses the operation of the TAP controller state machine. The TAP controller is a finite state  
machine that responds to the logic level at JTMS on the rising edge of JTCLK. Each of the states denoted in Figure  
8-2 are described in the following paragraphs.  
Test-Logic-Reset. Upon device power-up, the TAP controller starts in the Test-Logic-Reset state. The instruction  
register contains the IDCODE instruction. All system logic on the device operates normally.  
Run-Test-Idle. Run-Test-Idle is used between scan operations or during specific tests. The instruction register and  
all test registers remain idle.  
102  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Select-DR-Scan. All test registers retain their previous state. With JTMS low, a rising edge of JTCLK moves the  
controller into the Capture-DR state and initiates a scan sequence. JTMS high moves the controller to the Select-  
IR-SCAN state.  
Capture-DR. Data can be parallel-loaded into the test register selected by the current instruction. If the instruction  
does not call for a parallel load or the selected test register does not allow parallel loads, the register remains at its  
current value. On the rising edge of JTCLK, the controller goes to the Shift-DR state if JTMS is low or to the Exit1-  
DR state if JTMS is high.  
Shift-DR. The test register selected by the current instruction is connected between JTDI and JTDO and data is  
shifted one stage toward the serial output on each rising edge of JTCLK. If a test register selected by the current  
instruction is not placed in the serial path, it maintains its previous state.  
Exit1-DR. While in this state, a rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS high puts the controller in the Update-DR state,  
which terminates the scanning process. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low puts the controller in the Pause-DR  
state.  
Pause-DR. Shifting of the test registers is halted while in this state. All test registers selected by the current  
instruction retain their previous state. The controller remains in this state while JTMS is low. A rising edge on  
JTCLK with JTMS high puts the controller in the Exit2-DR state.  
Exit2-DR. While in this state, a rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS high puts the controller in the Update-DR state  
and terminates the scanning process. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low puts the controller in the Shift-DR  
state.  
Update-DR. A falling edge on JTCLK while in the Update-DR state latches the data from the shift register path of  
the test registers into the data output latches. This prevents changes at the parallel output because of changes in  
the shift register. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low puts the controller in the Run-Test-Idle state. With JTMS  
high, the controller enters the Select-DR-Scan state.  
Select-IR-Scan. All test registers retain their previous state. The instruction register remains unchanged during this  
state. With JTMS low, a rising edge on JTCLK moves the controller into the Capture-IR state and initiates a scan  
sequence for the instruction register. JTMS high during a rising edge on JTCLK puts the controller back into the  
Test-Logic-Reset state.  
Capture-IR. The Capture-IR state is used to load the shift register in the instruction register with a fixed value. This  
value is loaded on the rising edge of JTCLK. If JTMS is high on the rising edge of JTCLK, the controller enters the  
Exit1-IR state. If JTMS is low on the rising edge of JTCLK, the controller enters the Shift-IR state.  
Shift-IR. In this state, the instruction register’s shift register is connected between JTDI and JTDO and shifts data  
one stage for every rising edge of JTCLK toward the serial output. The parallel register and the test registers  
remain at their previous states. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS high moves the controller to the Exit1-IR state.  
A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low keeps the controller in the Shift-IR state, while moving data one stage  
through the instruction shift register.  
Exit1-IR. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low puts the controller in the Pause-IR state. If JTMS is high on the  
rising edge of JTCLK, the controller enters the Update-IR state and terminates the scanning process.  
Pause-IR. Shifting of the instruction register is halted temporarily. With JTMS high, a rising edge on JTCLK puts  
the controller in the Exit2-IR state. The controller remains in the Pause-IR state if JTMS is low during a rising edge  
on JTCLK.  
Exit2-IR. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS high puts the controller in the Update-IR state. The controller loops  
back to the Shift-IR state if JTMS is low during a rising edge of JTCLK in this state.  
Update-IR. The instruction shifted into the instruction shift register is latched into the parallel output on the falling  
edge of JTCLK as the controller enters this state. Once latched, this instruction becomes the current instruction. A  
103  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low puts the controller in the Run-Test-Idle state. With JTMS high, the controller  
enters the Select-DR-Scan state.  
Figure 8-2. JTAG TAP Controller State Machine  
Test-Logic-Reset  
1
0
1
1
Select  
Select  
1
Run-Test/Idle  
DR-Scan  
IR-Scan  
0
0
0
1
1
Capture-DR  
0
Capture-IR  
0
Shift-DR  
1
Shift-IR  
1
0
1
0
1
Exit1- DR  
0
Exit1-IR  
0
Pause-DR  
1
Pause-IR  
1
0
0
0
0
Exit2-DR  
1
Exit2-IR  
1
Update-DR  
Update-IR  
1
0
1
0
8.3 JTAG Instruction Register and Instructions  
The instruction register contains a shift register as well as a latched parallel output and is 3 bits in length. When the  
TAP controller enters the Shift-IR state, the instruction shift register is connected between JTDI and JTDO. While in  
the Shift-IR state, a rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low shifts data one stage toward the serial output at JTDO. A  
rising edge on JTCLK in the Exit1-IR state or the Exit2-IR state with JTMS high moves the controller to the Update-  
IR state. The falling edge of that same JTCLK latches the data in the instruction shift register to the instruction  
parallel output. Table 8-1 shows the instructions supported by the MAX24288 and their respective operational  
binary codes.  
Table 8-1. JTAG Instruction Codes  
INSTRUCTIONS  
SAMPLE/PRELOAD  
BYPASS  
SELECTED REGISTER  
Boundary Scan  
Bypass  
Boundary Scan  
Bypass  
Bypass  
Device Identification  
INSTRUCTION CODES  
010  
111  
000  
011  
100  
001  
EXTEST  
CLAMP  
HIGHZ  
IDCODE  
104  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
SAMPLE/PRELOAD. SAMPLE/RELOAD is a mandatory instruction for the IEEE 1149.1 specification. This  
instruction supports two functions. First, the digital I/Os of the device can be sampled at the boundary scan  
register, using the Capture-DR state, without interfering with the device’s normal operation. Second, data can be  
shifted into the boundary scan register through JTDI using the Shift-DR state.  
EXTEST. EXTEST allows testing of the interconnections to the device. When the EXTEST instruction is latched in  
the instruction register, the following actions occur: (1) Once the EXTEST instruction is enabled through the  
Update-IR state, the parallel outputs of the digital output pins are driven. (2) The boundary scan register is  
connected between JTDI and JTDO. (3) The Capture-DR state samples all digital inputs into the boundary scan  
register.  
BYPASS. When the BYPASS instruction is latched into the parallel instruction register, JTDI is connected to JTDO  
through the 1-bit bypass register. This allows data to pass from JTDI to JTDO without affecting the device’s normal  
operation.  
IDCODE. When the IDCODE instruction is latched into the parallel instruction register, the device identification  
register is selected. The device ID code is loaded into the device identification register on the rising edge of JTCLK,  
following entry into the Capture-DR state. Shift-DR can be used to shift the ID code out serially through JTDO.  
During Test-Logic-Reset, the ID code is forced into the instruction register’s parallel output.  
HIGHZ. All digital outputs are placed into a high-impedance state. The bypass register is connected between JTDI  
and JTDO.  
CLAMP. All digital output pins output data from the boundary scan parallel output while connecting the bypass  
register between JTDI and JTDO. The outputs do not change during the CLAMP instruction.  
8.4 JTAG Test Registers  
IEEE 1149.1 requires a minimum of two test registersthe bypass register and the boundary scan register. An  
optional test register, the identification register, has been included in the device design. It is used with the IDCODE  
instruction and the Test-Logic-Reset state of the TAP controller.  
Bypass Register. This is a single 1-bit shift register used with the BYPASS, CLAMP, and HIGHZ instructions to  
provide a short path between JTDI and JTDO.  
Boundary Scan Register. This register contains a shift register path and a latched parallel output for control cells  
and digital I/O cells. The BSDL file is available on the MAX24288 page of Microsemi’s website.  
Identification Register. This register contains a 32-bit shift register and a 32-bit latched parallel output. It is  
selected during the IDCODE instruction and when the TAP controller is in the Test-Logic-Reset state. The device  
identification code for the MAX24288 is shown in Table 8-2.  
Table 8-2. JTAG ID Code  
DEVICE  
REVISION  
DEVICE CODE  
MANUFACTURER CODE  
REQUIRED  
MAX24288  
Note 1  
0101 1110 1110 0000  
00010100001  
1
Note 1: 0000 = rev A1. 0001 = rev B1. Other values: contact factory.  
105  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
9. Electrical Characteristics  
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS  
Voltage Range on Any Signal IO Lead with Respect to VSS ................................................................-0.3V to +3.63V  
Supply Voltage (VDD12) Range with Respect to VSS ........................................................................-0.3V to +1.32V  
Supply Voltage (VDD33) Range with Respect to VSS.........................................................................-0.3V to +3.63V  
Operating Temperature Range: Industrial ............................................................................................-40°C to +85°C  
Storage Temperature Range...............................................................................................................-55°C to +125°C  
Lead Temperature (soldering, 10s)....................................................................................................................+300C  
Soldering Temperature (reflow) .........................................................................................................................+260°C  
Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only,  
and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated in the operational sections of the specifications is  
not implied. Exposure to the absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device. Ambient operating temperature range  
when device is mounted on a four-layer JEDEC test board with no airflow.  
Note 1: The typical values listed in the tables of section 9 are not production tested.  
Note 2: Specifications to TA = -40C are guaranteed by design and not production tested.  
9.1  
Recommended Operating Conditions  
Table 9-1. Recommended DC Operating Conditions  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
VDD12  
VDD33  
TA  
CONDITIONS  
MIN  
1.14  
3.135  
-40  
TYP  
1.2  
MAX  
1.26  
UNITS  
Supply Voltage, Nominal 1.2V  
Supply Voltage, Nominal 3.3V  
Ambient Temperature Range  
Junction Temperature Range  
V
V
3.3  
3.465  
+85  
°C  
°C  
TJ  
-40  
+125  
9.2  
DC Electrical Characteristics  
Unless otherwise stated, all specifications in this section are valid for VDD12 = 1.2V 5%, VDD33 = 3.3V 5%  
and TA = -40°C to +85°C.  
Table 9-2. DC Characteristics  
PARAMETER  
Supply Current, VDD12 Pins  
Supply Current, VDD33 Pin  
Supply Current, VDD12 Pins  
Supply Current, VDD33 Pin  
Supply Current Reduction, Rx  
Power-down, VDD12  
Supply Current Reduction, Rx  
Power-down, VDD33  
Supply Current Reduction, Tx  
Power-down, VDD12  
Supply Current Reduction, Tx  
Power-down, VDD33  
Supply Current Reduction, Time  
Engine Power-down, VDD12  
Supply Current, Full Power-  
down, VDD12  
SYMBOL  
IDD12  
CONDITIONS  
MIN  
TYP  
180  
100  
205  
140  
MAX  
UNITS  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
10, 25 or 125MHz REFCLK  
10, 25 or 125MHz REFCLK  
12.8MHz REFCLK (Note 1)  
12.8MHz REFCLK  
IDD33  
IDD12  
IDD33  
260  
175  
PTPCR1.RX_PWDN=1  
PTPCR1.RX_PWDN=1  
PTPCR1.TX_PWDN=1  
PTPCR1.TX_PWDN=1  
PTPCR1.TE_PWDN=1  
All PWDN=1 in PTPCR1  
All PWDN=1 in PTPCR1  
35  
20  
55  
10  
20  
2
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
IDDRX12  
IDDRX33  
IDDTX12  
IDDTX33  
IDDTE12  
IDDPD12  
Supply Current, Full Power-  
down, VDD33  
IDDPD33  
20  
Input Capacitance  
Output Capacitance  
CIN  
COUT  
4
7
pF  
pF  
Note 1: When a 12.8MHz oscillator is used the TX PLL uses a two-stage process to perform the frequency conversion and therefore consumes  
additional power.  
106  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
9.2.1 CMOS/TTL DC Characteristics  
Table 9-3. DC Characteristics for Parallel, MDIO and SPI Interfaces  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
CONDITIONS  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
Output High Voltage  
Output Low Voltage  
Output High Voltage  
Output Low Voltage  
Input High Voltage  
Input Low Voltage  
Input High Current  
VOH  
VOL  
VOH  
VOL  
VIH  
VIL  
IOH = -1mA, VDD33=3.135V  
IOL = 1mA, VDD33=3.135V  
MDC, MDIO. Notes 1, 3, 4  
MDC, MDIO. Notes 2, 3, 4  
2.4  
0
VDD33  
0.4  
V
V
2.4  
0
VDD33  
0.4  
V
V
2.0  
-0.2  
VDD33+0.2  
0.8  
V
V
VIN=3.3V  
VIN=0V  
IIH  
10  
A  
Input Low Current, all other  
Input Pins  
IIL  
-10  
-10  
A  
A  
Output and I/O Leakage  
(when High Impedance)  
ILO  
+10  
Note 1: IOH=-4mA  
Note 2: IOL=4mA  
Note 3: MDC load: 340pF max.  
Note 4: MDIO load: 340pF max plus 2k±5% pulldown resistor.  
9.2.2 SGMII/1000BASE-X DC Characteristics  
Table 9-4. SGMII/1000BASE-X Transmit DC Characteristics  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
CONDITIONS  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
V
Output Voltage High, TDP  
or TDN (Single-Ended)  
Output Voltage Low, TDP  
or TDN (Single-Ended)  
Output Common Mode  
Voltage  
VOH,DC  
TVDD33  
TVDD33  
0.4  
TVDD33  
0.2V  
VOL,DC  
V
DC-coupled. Load: 50  
pullup resistors to  
TVDD33 on TDP pin and  
on TDN pin. (Note 1)  
VOCM,DC  
VOD,DC  
V
Differential Output Voltage  
320  
640  
400  
800  
500  
mV  
mVP-P  
V
|VTDP VTDN  
|
Differential Output Voltage  
|VTDP VTDN| Peak-to-Peak  
Output Common Mode  
Voltage  
VOD,DC,PP  
VOCM,AC  
VOD,AC  
1000  
TVDD33  
0.4V  
Differential Output Voltage,  
AC-coupled to100load.  
See Figure 6-7.  
400  
mV  
mVP-P  
|VTDP VTDN  
|
Differential Output Voltage,  
|VTDP VTDN| Peak-to-Peak  
Output Impedance  
VOD,AC,PP  
800  
50  
ROUT  
ROUT  
Single Ended, to TVDD33  
35  
65  
10  
%
Mismatch in a pair  
Table 9-5. SGMII/1000BASE-X Receive DC Characteristics  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
CONDITIONS  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
Input Voltage, RDP pin  
Input Voltage, RDN pin  
Input Common Mode  
Voltage  
VRDP  
VRDN  
1.4  
1.4  
RVDD33  
RVDD33  
V
V
External components as  
shown in Figure 6-7.  
VICM  
VID  
2.64  
V
Input Differential Voltage  
|VRDP VRDN  
|
200  
1600  
mV  
107  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
9.3  
AC Electrical Characteristics  
Unless otherwise stated, all specifications in this section are valid for VDD12 = 1.2V 5%, VDD33 = 3.3V 5%  
and TA = -40°C to +85°C.  
9.3.1 REFCLK AC Characteristics  
Table 9-6. REFCLK AC Characteristics  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
CONDITIONS  
Note 1  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
-100  
40  
+100  
ppm  
%
ns  
Frequency Accuracy  
Duty Cycle  
Rise Time (2080%)  
Fall Time (2080%)  
REFCLK Jitter: See Table 9-10 below.  
f/f  
60  
1
1
tR  
tF  
ns  
Note 1: If the TX PLL is bypassed by setting PTPCR1.PLL_PWDN=1 then REFCLK duty cycle should be as close to 50% as possible  
because both edges of REFCLK are used by the 1588 circuitry.  
9.3.2 SGMII/1000BASE-X Interface Receive AC Characteristics  
Table 9-7. 1000BASE-X and SGMII Receive AC Characteristics  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
CONDITIONS  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
Input Data Rate, Nominal  
Input Frequency Accuracy  
Skew, RDP vs. RDN  
Note 1: Measured at 50% of the transition  
fIN  
f/f  
|tskew|  
1250  
Mbps  
ppm  
ps  
-100  
+100  
20  
Note 1  
Table 9-8. 1000BASE-X and SGMII Receive Jitter Tolerance  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
CONDITIONS  
UI p-p  
ps p-p  
Rx Jitter Tolerance, Deterministic Jitter, max  
Rx Jitter Tolerance, Total Jitter, max  
DJRD  
TJRD  
Note 1, 2  
Note 1, 2  
0.46  
0.75  
370  
600  
Note 1: Jitter requirements represent high-frequency jitter (above 637kHz) and do not represent low-frequency jitter or wander. Random jitter  
= Total Jitter minus Deterministic Jitter.  
Note 2: The bandwidth of the CDR PLL is approximately 4MHz.  
9.3.3 SGMII/1000BASE-X Interface Transmit AC Characteristics  
Table 9-9. SGMII and 1000BASE-X Transmit AC Characteristics  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
CONDITIONS  
MIN  
48  
100  
100  
250  
TYP  
MAX  
52  
200  
200  
550  
UNITS  
%
ps  
ps  
ps  
TCLKP/TCLKN Duty Cycle  
Rise Time (2080%)  
Fall Time (2080%)  
at 625MHz  
tR  
tF  
tclock2q  
TCLK edge to TD valid data  
Note 1  
Note 1: Measured at 0V differential. Does not include effects of jitter. Guaranteed by design and not production tested.  
Table 9-10. 1000BASE-X Transmit Jitter Characteristics  
Typical  
Max  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
CONDITIONS  
UI p-p  
0.025  
ps p-p  
20  
UI p-p  
0.10  
0.24  
ps p-p  
80  
Tx Output Jitter, Deterministic  
Tx Output Jitter, Total  
DJTD  
TJTD  
Note 1, 2  
Note 1, 2  
0.0875  
70  
192  
Note 1: Jitter requirements represent high-frequency jitter (above 637kHz) and do not represent low-frequency jitter or wander. Random jitter  
= Total Jitter minus Deterministic Jitter.  
108  
 
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Note 2: Typical values are room-temperature measurements with a Connor-Winfield MX010 crystal oscillator connected to the REFCLK pin.  
Note that the bandwidth of the TX PLL is in the 300-400kHz range.  
109  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
9.3.4 Parallel Interface Receive AC Characteristics  
Figure 9-1. MII/GMII/RGMII Receive Timing Waveforms  
tPERIOD  
tLOW  
RXCLK  
tHIGH  
tDELAY  
RXD, RX_DV, RX_ER  
Table 9-11. GMII Receive AC Characteristics  
PARAMETER  
RXCLK Period  
SYMBOL  
CONDITIONS  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
tPERIOD  
7.5  
40  
8
8.5  
60  
ns  
%
Rx Clock Duty Cycle  
RXCLK Rising Edge to RXD,  
RX_DV, RX_ER Valid  
tDELAY  
Note 1  
1
5.5  
ns  
RXCLK Rise Time  
tR  
tF  
GMII mode, 0.7V to 1.9V  
GMII mode, 1.9V to 0.7V  
0.7V to 1.9V, Note 2  
1
1
ns  
ns  
RXCLK Fall Time  
RXCLK Slew Rate Rising  
RXCLK Slew Rate Falling  
0.6  
0.6  
V/ns  
V/ns  
1.9V to 0.7V, Note 2  
Note 1: 802.3 specifies setup and hold times for the receiver of the signals. This output delay specification has values that ensure 802.3 setup  
and hold specifications are met.  
Note 2: Clock Slew rate is the instantaneous rate of change of the clock potential with respect to time (dV/dt), not an average value over the  
entire rise or fall time interval. Conformance with this specification guarantees that the clock signals will rise and fall monotonically  
through the switching region.  
Note 3: All specifications in this table are guaranteed by design with output load of 5pF.  
Table 9-12. RGMII-1000 Receive AC Characteristics  
PARAMETER  
RXCLK Period  
SYMBOL  
CONDITIONS  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
tPERIOD  
7.5  
45  
8
8.5  
55  
ns  
%
RXCLK Duty Cycle  
tLOW % of tPERIOD , Note 1  
Notes 2, 3  
RXCLK to RXD, RX_CTL  
Delay  
tDELAY  
-0.2  
0.8  
ns  
Rise Time, All RX Signals  
Fall Time, All RX Signals  
tR  
tF  
20% to 80%  
20% to 80%  
0.75  
0.75  
ns  
ns  
Note 1: Per the RGMII spec, duty cycle may be stretched/shrunk during speed changes or while transitioning to a received packet's clock  
domain as long as minimum duty cycle is not violated and stretching occurs for no more than three clock cycles of the lowest speed  
transitioned between.  
Note 2: RXCLK timing is from both edges in RGMII 1000 Mbps mode.  
Note 3: The RGMII specification requires clocks to be routed such that a trace delay is added to the RXCLK signal to provide sufficient setup  
time for RXD and RX_CTL vs. RXCLK at the receiving component.  
Note 4: All specifications in this table are guaranteed by design with output load of 5pF.  
110  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Table 9-13. RGMII-10/100 Receive AC Characteristics  
10 Mbps  
TYP  
100 Mbps  
TYP  
PARAMETER  
RXCLK Period  
SYMBOL  
UNITS  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
tPERIOD  
400  
40  
ns  
%
RXCLK Duty Cycle (Note 4)  
45  
55  
45  
55  
RXCLK to RXD, RX_CTL  
Delay (Notes 1, 2)  
tDELAY  
tR  
-0.2  
0.8  
-0.2  
0.8  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Rise Time, All RX Signals,  
20% to 80%  
0.75  
0.75  
0.75  
0.75  
Fall Time, All RX Signals,  
20% to 80%  
tF  
Note 1: RXCLK to RXD is timed from rising edge.  
Note 2: RXCLK to RX_CTL is timed from both RXCLK edges.  
Note 3: Per the RGMII spec, duty cycle may be stretched/shrunk during speed changes or while transitioning to a received packet's clock  
domain as long as minimum duty cycle is not violated and stretching occurs for no more than three clock cycles of the lowest speed  
transitioned between.  
Note 4: All specifications in this table are guaranteed by design with output load of 5pF.  
Table 9-14. MIIDCE Receive AC Characteristics  
10 Mbps  
TYP  
100 Mbps  
TYP  
PARAMETER  
RXCLK Period  
SYMBOL  
UNITS  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
tPERIOD  
400  
40  
ns  
%
RXCLK Duty Cycle  
45  
55  
45  
18  
55  
30  
RXCLK to RXD, RX_DV,  
RX_ER Delay  
tDELAY  
180  
230  
ns  
Note 1: RXCLK is an output in this mode.  
Note 2: 802.3 specifies setup and hold times, but setup and hold specifications are typically for inputs to an IC rather than outputs. This output  
delay specification has values that ensure 802.3 setup and hold specifications are met.  
Note 3: All specifications in this table are guaranteed by design with output load of 5pF.  
Table 9-15. MIIDTE Receive AC Characteristics  
10 Mbps  
TYP  
100 Mbps  
TYP  
PARAMETER  
RXCLK Period  
SYMBOL  
UNITS  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
tPERIOD  
400  
40  
ns  
%
RXCLK Duty Cycle  
45  
0
55  
10  
45  
0
55  
10  
RXCLK to RXD, RX_DV,  
RX_ER Delay  
tDELAY  
ns  
Note 1: RXCLK is an input in this mode.  
Note 2: 802.3 specifies setup and hold times, but setup and hold specifications are typically for inputs to an IC rather than outputs. This output  
delay specification has values that ensure 802.3 setup and hold specifications are met.  
Note 3: All specifications in this table are guaranteed by design with output load of 5pF.  
111  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
9.3.5 Parallel Interface Transmit AC Characteristics  
Figure 9-2. MII/GMII/RGMII Transmit Timing Waveforms  
tPERIOD  
tHIGH  
TX_CLK  
GTX_CLK  
tLOW  
tSETUP  
tHOLD  
TXD[7:0]  
TX_EN,  
TX_ER  
Table 9-16. GMII and RGMII-1000 Transmit AC Characteristics  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
CONDITIONS  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
Input Voltage Low, AC  
Input Voltage High, AC  
GTXCLK Period  
VIL_AC  
VIH_AC  
tPERIOD  
tLOW  
0.9  
V
V
1.7  
7.2  
2.5  
2.5  
8
8.8  
ns  
ns  
ns  
GTXCLK Low Time  
GTXCLK High Time  
tHIGH  
GMII mode, tLOW % of  
tPERIOD  
GTXCLK Duty Cycle  
GTXCLK Duty Cycle  
40  
45  
60  
55  
%
%
RGMII-1000 mode,  
tLOW % of tPERIOD  
GTXCLK, TXD, TX_DV,  
TX_ER Rise Time  
30% to 70% of VDD33,  
Note 1  
tR  
tF  
0.5  
0.5  
1
2
2
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
GTXCLK, TXD, TX_DV,  
TX_ER Fall Time  
70% to 30% of VDD33,  
Note 1  
TXD, TX_DV, TX_ER to  
GTXCLK Setup Time  
tSETUP  
tHOLD  
Note 1  
Note 1  
GTXCLK to TXD, TX_DV,  
TX_ER Hold Time  
0
Note 1: GTXCLK timing is from both edges in RGMII 1000 Mbps mode.  
Note 2: All specifications in this table are guaranteed by design.  
112  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Table 9-17. RGMII-10/100 Transmit AC Characteristics  
10 Mbps  
TYP  
100 Mbps  
TYP  
PARAMETER  
GTXCLK Period  
SYMBOL  
UNITS  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
tPERIOD  
400  
40  
ns  
GTXCLK Duty Cycle  
(Note 3)  
40  
1
60  
40  
1
60  
%
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
TXD, TX_CTL to GTXCLK  
Setup Time  
tSETUP  
tHOLD  
tR  
GTXCLK to TXD, TX_CTL  
Hold Time  
0
0
Rise Time, All TX Signals,  
0.5V to 2.0V  
0.75  
0.75  
0.75  
0.75  
Fall Time, All TX Signals,  
0.5V to 2.0V  
tF  
Note 1: TXCLK to TXD is timed from rising edge.  
Note 2: TXCLK to TX_CTL is timed from both TXCLK edges.  
Note 3: Per the RGMII spec, duty cycle may be stretched/shrunk during speed changes or while transitioning to a received packet's clock  
domain as long as minimum duty cycle is not violated and stretching occurs for no more than three clock cycles of the lowest speed  
transitioned between.  
Note 4: All specifications in this table are guaranteed by design.  
Table 9-18. MIIDCE Transmit AC Characteristics  
10 Mbps  
TYP  
100 Mbps  
TYP  
UNITS  
PARAMETER  
TXCLK Period  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
tPERIOD  
400  
40  
ns  
%
TXCLK Duty Cycle  
45  
55  
45  
55  
TXD, TX_DV, TX_ER to  
TXCLK Setup Time  
tSETUP  
tHOLD  
6.5  
6.5  
ns  
ns  
TXCLK to TXD, TX_DV,  
TX_ER Hold Time  
0
0
Note 1: TXCLK is an output in this mode.  
Note 2: All specifications in this table are guaranteed by design.  
Table 9-19. MIIDTE Transmit AC Characteristics  
10 Mbps  
TYP  
100 Mbps  
TYP  
PARAMETER  
TXCLK Period  
SYMBOL  
UNITS  
MIN  
MAX  
MIN  
MAX  
tPERIOD  
400  
40  
ns  
%
TXCLK Duty Cycle  
40  
60  
40  
60  
TXD, TX_DV, TX_ER to  
TXCLK Setup Time  
tSETUP  
tHOLD  
6.5  
6.5  
ns  
ns  
TXCLK to TXD, TX_DV,  
TX_ER Hold Time  
0
0
Note 1: TXCLK is an input in this mode.  
Note 2: All specifications in this table are guaranteed by design.  
113  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
9.3.6 MDIO Interface AC Characteristics  
Table 9-20. MDIO Interface AC Characteristics  
Parameter  
MDC Input Period (12.5MHz)  
MDC Input High  
Symbol Conditions  
Min  
80  
30  
30  
10  
10  
0
Typ  
Max  
Units  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t1  
t2  
t3  
t4  
t5  
t6  
t6  
Note 1  
Notes 1, 2  
Notes 1, 2  
Note 1  
Note 1  
Note 1,3  
Note 1,4  
MDC Input Low  
MDIO Input Setup Time to MDC  
MDIO Input Hold Time from MDC  
MDC to MDIO Output Delay  
MDC to MDIO High Impedance  
40  
40  
0
Note 1: The input/output timing reference level for all signals is VDD33 / 2. All parameters are with 340pF load on MDC and 340pF load and  
2kpulldown on MDIO.  
Note 2: All specifications in this table are guaranteed by design.  
Note 3: Data is valid on MDIO until min delay time.  
Note 4: When going to high impedance, data is valid until min and signal is high impedance after max.  
Figure 9-3. MDIO Interface Timing  
t1  
t2  
t3  
MDC  
t4  
t5  
MDIO  
(input)  
t6  
MDIO  
(output)  
114  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
9.3.7 SPI Interface AC Characteristics  
Table 9-21. SPI Interface Timing  
PARAMETER (Note 1)  
SYMBOL  
fBUS  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
MHz  
ns  
SCLK Frequency  
SCLK Cycle Time  
25  
tCYC  
40  
5
CS_N Setup to First SCLK Edge  
CS_N Hold Time After Last SCLK Edge  
SCLK High Time  
tSUC  
ns  
tHDC  
tCLKH  
tCLKL  
tSUI  
5
ns  
15  
15  
5
ns  
SCLK Low Time  
ns  
SDI Data Setup Time  
ns  
SDI Data Hold Time  
tHDI  
5
ns  
SDO Enable Time (High-Impedance to Output Active) (Note 4)  
SDO Disable Time (Output Active to High-Impedance)  
SDO Data Valid Time (Note 3)  
tEN  
5
15  
15  
16  
ns  
tDIS  
ns  
tDV  
5
ns  
Note 1: All timing is specified with 100pF load on all SPI pins.  
Note 2: All specifications in this table are guaranteed by design.  
Note 3: Data is valid on SDO until min delay time.  
Note 4: SDO is high impedance for at least min enable time.  
115  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Figure 9-4. SPI Interface Timing Diagram  
CPHA = 0  
CS  
tHDC  
tSUC  
tCYC  
tCLKL  
SCLK,  
CPOL=0  
tCLKH  
tCLKL  
SCLK,  
CPOL=1  
tCLKH  
tSUI tHDI  
SDI  
tDV  
tDIS  
SDO  
tEN  
tHDO  
CPHA = 1  
CS  
tHDC  
tSUC  
tCYC  
tCLKL  
SCLK,  
CPOL=0  
tCLKH  
tCLKL  
SCLK,  
CPOL=1  
tCLKH  
tSUI tHDI  
SDI  
tDV  
tDIS  
SDO  
tEN  
tHDO  
116  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
9.3.8 JTAG Interface AC Characteristics  
Table 9-22. JTAG Interface Timing  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
JTCLK Clock Period  
t1  
1000  
ns  
JTCLK Clock High/Low Time (Note 1)  
JTCLK to JTDI, JTMS Setup Time  
JTCLK to JTDI, JTMS Hold Time  
JTCLK to JTDO Delay  
t2/t3  
t4  
50  
50  
50  
2
500  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t5  
t6  
50  
50  
JTCLK to JTDO High-Impedance Delay (Note 2)  
JTRST Width Low Time  
t7  
t8  
100  
Note 1: Clock can be stopped high or low.  
Note 2: All specifications in this table are guaranteed by design.  
Figure 9-5. JTAG Timing Diagram  
t1  
t2  
t3  
JTCLK  
t4  
t5  
JTDI, JTMS  
t6  
t7  
JTDO  
t8  
JTRST  
117  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
9.3.9 1588 GPIO Propagation Delays  
Table 9-23. 1588 GPIO Propagation Delays  
PARAMETER  
GPIO1 Input Edge to Input Timestamper 1  
GPIO2 Input Edge to Input Timestamper 1  
GPIO3 Input Edge to Input Timestamper 1  
GPIO1 Input Edge to Input Timestamper 2  
GPIO2 Input Edge to Input Timestamper 2  
GPIO3 Input Edge to Input Timestamper 2  
GPIO1 Input Edge to Input Timestamper 3  
GPIO2 Input Edge to Input Timestamper 3  
GPIO3 Input Edge to Input Timestamper 3  
PEG1 to GPO1 Output Edge  
PEG1 to GPIO1 Output Edge  
PEG1 to GPIO3 Output Edge  
PEG1 to GPIO4 Output Edge  
PEG1 to GPIO5 Output Edge  
PEG1 to GPIO6 Output Edge  
PEG1 to GPIO7 Output Edge  
PEG2 to GPO2 Output Edge  
PEG2 to GPIO2 Output Edge  
SYMBOL  
tIO1-TS1  
tIO2-TS1  
tIO3-TS1  
tIO1-TS2  
tIO2-TS2  
tIO3-TS2  
tIO1-TS3  
tIO2-TS3  
tIO3-TS3  
tP1-O1  
tP1-IO1  
tP1-IO3  
tP1-IO4  
tP1-IO5  
tP1-IO6  
tP1-IO7  
tP2-O2  
MIN  
TYP  
2.46  
2.46  
2.49  
1.82  
1.85  
1.84  
1.83  
1.86  
1.84  
2.65  
2.53  
2.44  
2.42  
2.48  
2.54  
2.50  
2.33  
2.45  
2.45  
2.51  
2.33  
2.50  
MAX UNITS  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tP2-IO2  
tP2-IO4  
tP2-IO5  
tP2-IO6  
tP2-IO7  
PEG2 to GPIO4 Output Edge  
PEG2 to GPIO5 Output Edge  
PEG2 to GPIO6 Output Edge  
PEG2 to GPIO7 Output Edge  
Note 1: The values in the table above are valid when the TX PLL is not bypassed (see section 6.10.2)  
9.3.10 Packet Timestamp Latencies  
Table 9-24. Transmit/Egress Packet Timestamp to First Bit After SFD on TDP/TDN  
MODE OF OPERATION  
10/100/1000Mbps parallel interface, no egress on-the-  
fly packet modifications enabled (see section 6.13.7)  
1000Mbps parallel interface, any egress on-the-fly  
packet modifications enabled  
100Mbps parallel interface, any egress on-the-fly  
packet modifications enabled  
10Mbps parallel interface, any egress on-the-fly  
packet modifications enabled  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
46  
ns  
366  
ns  
s  
s  
3.174  
31.254  
Table 9-25. Receive/Ingress First Bit After SFD on RDP/RDN to Packet Timestamp  
MODE OF OPERATION  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
All parallel interface data rates, all modes  
9
ns  
118  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
10. Pin Assignments  
GVSS  
CVDD33  
CVDD12  
CVSS  
TCLKN  
TCLKP  
TVDD33  
TDN  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
51 TXD[3]  
50 TXD[2]  
49 TXD[1]  
48 TXD[0]  
47 DVSS  
46 TXCLK  
45 CS_N  
44 JTDO  
43 JTRST_N  
42 MDIO  
41 MDC  
40 RXCLK  
39 DVDD33  
38 RXD[0]  
37 RXD[1]  
36 RXD[2]  
35 RXD[3]  
TDP  
TVSS 10  
TVDD12 11  
RVDD33 12  
RDP 13  
RDN 14  
RVSS 15  
RVDD12 16  
N.C. 17  
N.C. = Not connected internally.  
119  
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
11. Package and Thermal Information  
Note: The exposed pad (EP) on the bottom of this package must be connected to the ground plane. EP also  
functions as a heatsink. Solder to the circuit-board ground plane to achieve the thermal specifications listed below.  
120  
 
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ MAX24288  
Table 11-1. Package Thermal Properties, Natural Convection  
CONDITIONS  
PARAMETER  
Ambient Temperature  
Junction Temperature  
MIN  
-40C  
-40C  
TYP  
MAX  
+85C  
+125C  
Note 1  
Note 2  
Theta-JA (JA)  
Theta-JC (JC)  
20.2 C/W  
1 C/W  
Note 1:  
Note 2:  
The package is mounted on a four-layer JEDEC standard test board with no airflow and dissipating maximum power.  
Theta-JA (JA) is the junction to ambient thermal resistance, when the package is mounted on a four-layer JEDEC standard  
test board with no airflow and dissipating maximum power.  
12. Data Sheet Revision History  
REVISION  
DATE  
DESCRIPTION  
2011-06  
2012-04  
Initial release  
Reformatted for Microsemi. No content change.  
In the paragraph before Table 6-3, added a note to indicate that when RX_ER and RXD[7:4] are  
all high at reset the device enters factory test mode.  
2012-06  
In Table 9-2 changed IDDPD33 from 5mA typ to 20mA to correct a typo.  
2012-07  
2012-08  
Added section 6.15, Power Supply Considerations.  
Added section 6.16, Startup Procedure.  
Deleted section 6.15 because the recommendation there is no longer needed when the startup  
procedure in section 6.16 is followed.  
In section 9.3.1, loosened input REFCLK duty cycle spec from 48% min, 52% max to 40% min,  
60% max and added Note 1.  
2013-01  
In Table 11-1 added Theta-JC spec.  
In Table 5-2 added a sentence to the REFCLK pin description to say that it is internally biased  
with a 10kresistor to 1.2V.  
Redid section 11 to include the package outline drawing instead of referring to a separate  
document.  
2016-02  
In the JIT_DIAG.JIT_PAT description, corrected the 001 decode text from Annex 36A.4 to Annex  
36A.1.  
2016-04  
2016-11  
2019-04  
In Table 5-5 clarified that JTRST_N should be held low during power-up.  
Added tape-and-reel ordering part number.  
Change "+" to "2" in ordering part numbers.  
121  
 
Microsemi Corporation (Nasdaq: MSCC) offers a comprehensive portfolio of semiconductor  
and system solutions for communications, defense & security, aerospace and industrial  
markets. Products include high-performance and radiation-hardened analog mixed-signal  
integrated circuits, FPGAs, SoCs and ASICs; power management products; timing and  
synchronization devices and precise time solutions, setting the world’s standard for time; voice  
processing devices; RF solutions; discrete components; security technologies and scalable  
anti-tamper products; Power-over-Ethernet ICs and midspans; as well as custom design  
capabilities and services. Microsemi is headquartered in Aliso Viejo, Calif., and has  
approximately 3,400 employees globally. Learn more at www.microsemi.com.  
Microsemi Corporate Headquarters  
One Enterprise, Aliso Viejo,  
CA 92656 USA  
Microsemi makes no warranty, representation, or guarantee regarding the information contained herein or  
the suitability of its products and services for any particular purpose, nor does Microsemi assume any  
liability whatsoever arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit. The products sold  
hereunder and any other products sold by Microsemi have been subject to limited testing and should not  
be used in conjunction with mission-critical equipment or applications. Any performance specifications are  
believed to be reliable but are not verified, and Buyer must conduct and complete all performance and  
other testing of the products, alone and together with, or installed in, any end-products. Buyer shall not  
rely on any data and performance specifications or parameters provided by Microsemi. It is the Buyer’s  
responsibility to independently determine suitability of any products and to test and verify the same. The  
information provided by Microsemi hereunder is provided “as is, where is” and with all faults, and the  
entire risk associated with such information is entirely with the Buyer. Microsemi does not grant, explicitly  
or implicitly, to any party any patent rights, licenses, or any other IP rights, whether with regard to such  
information itself or anything described by such information. Information provided in this document is  
Within the USA: +1 (800) 713-4113  
Outside the USA: +1 (949) 380-6100  
Sales: +1 (949) 380-6136  
Fax: +1 (949) 215-4996  
E-mail: sales.support@microsemi.com  
©
2019 Microsemi Corporation. All  
rights reserved. Microsemi and the  
Microsemi logo are trademarks of  
Microsemi Corporation. All other  
trademarks and service marks are the proprietary to Microsemi, and Microsemi reserves the right to make any changes to the information in this  
property of their respective owners.  
document or to any products and services at any time without notice.  

相关型号:

MAX24288ETK2T

ATM/SONET/SDH IC,
MICROSEMI

MAX242C

+5V-Powered, Multichannel RS-232 Drivers/Receivers
MAXIM

MAX242C/D

Transceiver
MAXIM

MAX242CAP

+5V-Powered, Multichannel RS-232 Drivers/Receivers
MAXIM

MAX242CAP+

5V-Powered, Multichannel RS-232 Drivers/Receivers
MAXIM

MAX242CAP+T

Line Transceiver, 2 Func, 2 Driver, 2 Rcvr, CMOS, PDSO20, SSOP-20
MAXIM

MAX242CAP-T

Line Transceiver, 2 Func, 2 Driver, 2 Rcvr, CMOS, PDSO20, SSOP-20
MAXIM

MAX242CD

MAX220–MAX249 5V-Powered, Multichannel RS-232 Drivers/Receivers
MAXIM

MAX242CPN

+5V-Powered, Multichannel RS-232 Drivers/Receivers
MAXIM

MAX242CPN+

5V-Powered, Multichannel RS-232 Drivers/Receivers
MAXIM

MAX242CWN

+5V-Powered, Multichannel RS-232 Drivers/Receivers
MAXIM

MAX242CWN+

5V-Powered, Multichannel RS-232 Drivers/Receivers
MAXIM